User Guide

Installation and Operation Manual
6 GHz 38 GHz
SLF-H
Release 2.2
Microwave Radio Link
Page 0-2
SLF-H Installation and Operation Manual 253 255 964-D
February
2011
June 2010
Change description
Release 2.2
Release 2.1 bis
ACM configuration
Initial release in original issue
(3 000 337 386 R11 000-04)
253 255 964-D
(3 000 337 386 R11 000-03)
253 255 964-C
(3 000 337 386 R11 000-02)
253 255 964-B
November
2009
September
2009
253 255 964-A
(3 000 337 386 R11 000-01)
Date
No.
(Each new edition supersedes the previous edition)
HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST
All pages
All pages
Page 0-3
1.8, 2.4.1, 6.5
All pages
Page
To facilitate recycling, please respect the sorting rules set up locally for this kind of waste.
The presence of the logo (green dot) means that a contribution is paid to an approved
national organisation to improve packaging recovery and recycling infrastructures.
In this respect, the European regulations ask you to dispose of it selectively:

x At sales points in the event of the purchase of similar equipment.
x At the collection points made available to you locally (drop-off centre, selective
collection, etc.).
The crossed-out waste bin stuck on the product (or on its accessories) means that the
product belongs to the family of electrical and electronic equipment.
Page 0-4
In this way you can participate in the re-use and upgrading of WEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment), which can have an effect on the environment and human health.
THE PRODUCT:
If your product contains batteries, they must be disposed of at appropriate collection points.
BATTERIES:
PACKAGING:
Preservation of the environment as part of a sustainable development logic is an essential concern of

Sagemcom.
The desire of Sagemcom is to operate systems observing the environment and consequently it has decided
to integrate environmental performances in the life cycle of its products, from manufacturing to commissioning,
use and elimination.
ENVIRONMENT
All trademarks are registered by their owners.
It therefore reserves the right to change its documentation without prior notice.
Sagemcom carefully monitors all technical changes and strives continuously to improve its products for the
benefit of its customers.
WARNING
Page 0-5
2.5 - MAC FILTERING .................................................................................................................................................... 2-6

2.6 - COUNTERS ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.4.4.1 - Description................................................................................................................................................................. 2-4

2.4.4.2 - Limitation of port bandwidth ..................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.4.3 - Flow control............................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.4.4 - Drop of frames........................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.4.4.1 - Principe................................................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.4.4.4.2 - Output queues (traffic classes)............................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.4.4.4.3 - Control of flows rate (policing) ........................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.4.4.4 - CIR/PIR values .................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.4.4.5 - Shaping of "Very High Priority" traffic class ...................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4 - SERVICE QUALITY (QOS) ....................................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.4.1 - Generalities..................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.2 - Frames classification ...................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.3 - Metering.......................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.4 - Congestion handling....................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2.1 - EPLAN mode ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-2

2.3.2.2 - EVPLINE/EVPLAN modes....................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 - PORTS .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 - Definition......................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.2 - Jumbo frames ................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2.3 - Available Ethernet radio bandwidth (ACM) .................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 - TOPOLOGIES ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.1 - 4 EPLINE mode .............................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3.2 - Advanced mode.............................................................................................................................. 2-2
2. GIGABIT ETHERNET FUNCTION ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
1.5 - ACM CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................................................... 1-13

1.6 - 2+0 CONFIGURATIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.6.1 - 2+0 FD .......................................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.6.2 - 2+0 XPIC ...................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.4.3.1 - Transmitter operation & performances .................................................................................................................... 1-12

1.4.3.2 - Receiver operation & performances ........................................................................................................................ 1-12
1.4.3 - 1+1 Frequency diversity ............................................................................................................... 1-11
1.4.2.1 - Transmitter operation & performances .................................................................................................................... 1-10

1.4.2 - 1+1 Space diversity ...................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.4.1.1 - Transmitter operation & performances ...................................................................................................................... 1-9

1.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 - DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 - System composition ....................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 - IDU version ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 - Modem version ............................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.4 - Fan version ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.5 - Optional MUX64 SPDH version...................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.6 - ODU Versions................................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 - SLF-H FEATURES ................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.1 - SLF-H block diagrams .................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 - IDU features.................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3.3 - Modem features.............................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.3.4 - ODU features.................................................................................................................................. 1-8
1.3.5 - MUX64 SPDH shelf features .......................................................................................................... 1-8
1.4 - PROTECTED CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.4.1 - 1+1 Hot Stand By ........................................................................................................................... 1-9
1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 0-6
4.5.6.1 - Simulating an IDU Alarm........................................................................................................................................ 4-30

4.5.6.2 - Simulating an ODU Alarm ...................................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.5.6.3 - Simulating a Gigabit Ethernet Alarm....................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.5.6.4 - Simulating a tributary alarm .................................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 - CONFIGURING EQUIPMENT IP ADDRESSES .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.3 - PILOT SOFTWARE AND IP CONNECTIVITY ............................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 - Installing the software Pilot Launcher............................................................................................. 4-6
4.3.2 - Installing the Pilot software............................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3.3 - IP connectivity................................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.4 - Launch Auto Pilot with the Pilot Launcher:..................................................................................... 4-9
4.3.5 - Starting a Pilot session ................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.4 - LINK PRELIMINARY CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.1 - Setting the parameters of each IDU ............................................................................................. 4-11
4.4.2 - Antenna alignment........................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.4.3 - Antenna alignment in XPIC mode ................................................................................................ 4-21
4.5 - TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS REQUIRED ................................................................................................................ 4-23
4.5.1 - Frequency Scan............................................................................................................................ 4-23
4.5.2 - Receive signal level...................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.5.3 - Giga Ethernet transmission test ................................................................................................... 4-24
4.5.4 - 2 Mbit/s tributary test (optional) .................................................................................................... 4-28
4.5.5 - Wayside test (optional) ................................................................................................................. 4-29
4.5.6 - Alarm relay test (optional)............................................................................................................. 4-30
4. COMMISSIONING CONFIGURATION AND TESTS .......................................................................................... 4-1
3.8.3 - MUX32 SPDH version .................................................................................................................. 3-21

3.8.4 - Cable References for MUX64 SPDH shelf................................................................................... 3-22
3.9 - POWERING UP THE SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................. 3-23
3.8.2.1 - "POWER" access 4-pin connector ........................................................................................................................ 3-19

3.8.2.2 - G703 2 Mbit/s ports - 78-pin DB connectors........................................................................................................... 3-19
3.7.3 - Cable references for SLF-H.......................................................................................................... 3-16

3.7.4 - Module references for SLF-H ....................................................................................................... 3-18
3.8 - MUX64 SPDH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................................................................ 3-18
3.8.1 - Front panel accesses of MUX 64 SPDH shelf.............................................................................. 3-19
3.8.2 - Description of accesses and connectors...................................................................................... 3-19
3.7.2.1 - "POWER" access 4-pin connector ........................................................................................................................ 3-10

3.7.2.2 - The connector pinout is as follows: ......................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.7.2.3 - "Alarms in/out" access High density 15-pin DB connector .................................................................................. 3-10
3.7.2.4 - "Mgmt" and "Wayside" Ethernet ports .................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.7.2.5 - Gigabit Ethernet ports "GbE1" to "GbE4" ............................................................................................................... 3-12
3.7.2.6 - G703 2 Mbit/s ports - 44-pin DB connectors........................................................................................................... 3-13
3.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 - UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.3 - IDU INSTALLATION................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.4 - ANTENNA INSTALLATION....................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.4.1 - Antenna mount ............................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.4.2 - Antenna Installation ........................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.5 - ODU INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.5.1 - 1+0 Configuration with integrated antenna..................................................................................... 3-4
3.5.2 - 1+0 Configuration with pole mount and standard antenna............................................................. 3-5
3.5.3 - "Hot standby" 1+1 configuration with coupler and integrated antenna .......................................... 3-5
3.5.4 - 1+1 hot standby configuration with remote mounted coupler and standard antenna .................... 3-6
3.5.5 - 1+1 space diversity configuration with 2 antennas......................................................................... 3-7
3.5.6 - 1+1 frequency diversity configuration with remote mounts and dual polarized antenna ............... 3-7
3.5.7 - 1+1 frequency diversity configuration with 2 antennas .................................................................. 3-7
3.5.8 - 2+0 frequency diversity configuration with remote mounts and dual polarized antenna ............... 3-7
3.5.9 - 2+0 frequency diversity configuration with 2 antennas .................................................................. 3-7
3.5.10 - 2+0 XPIC configuration with remote mounts and dual polarized antenna ................................... 3-7
3.6 - INSTALLING THE IDU TO ODU COAXIAL CABLE ................................................................................................... 3-8
3.7 - CONNECTING THE IDU TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................. 3-9
3.7.1 - IDU Front panel accesses .............................................................................................................. 3-9
3.7.2 - Description of accesses and connectors...................................................................................... 3-10
3. INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Page 0-7
6.1 - HELP MENU ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-3

6.2 - FILE MENU ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.1 - "File / System Report" menu .......................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 - "File / IDU Configuration / Local or Remote / Save" menu............................................................. 6-4
6. OPERATION PILOT............................................................................................................................................... 6-1
5.4 - CONFIGURING 2 MBIT/S PORTS............................................................................................................................. 5-32

5.5 - CONFIGURING THE ALARM THRESHOLDS .............................................................................................................. 5-34
5.5.1 - BER and ACM alarm thresholds................................................................................................... 5-34
5.5.2 - RSL alarm threshold..................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.5.3 - Ethernet bitrate alarm threshold ................................................................................................... 5-35
5.6 - CONFIGURING THE ALARMS ................................................................................................................................. 5-36
5.6.1 - General parameters...................................................................................................................... 5-36
5.6.2 - "IDU" tab ....................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.6.3 - "Modem" tab ................................................................................................................................. 5-38
5.6.4 - "Radio" tab.................................................................................................................................... 5-38
5.6.5 - "Tributaries" tab ............................................................................................................................ 5-40
5.6.6 - "Gigabit Ethernet" tab ................................................................................................................... 5-41
5.6.7 - "Fans" tab ..................................................................................................................................... 5-41
5.6.8 - Default configuration of the alarm relays...................................................................................... 5-43
5.7 - CONFIGURING THE AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL (ATPC) ............................................................... 5-43
5.8 - SPECIFIC CONFIGURATIONS FOR 1+1 SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................... 5-44
5.3.5.1 - Flow control............................................................................................................................................................. 5-27

5.3.5.2 - Mac filtering ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-28
5.3.5.3 - Fast link shutdown................................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.3.5.4 - FDB management .................................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.3.5.5 - Ethernet with 2+0 XPIC or FD modes..................................................................................................................... 5-30
5.3.5.6 - Ethernet with ACM.................................................................................................................................................. 5-30
5.3.5 - Other features............................................................................................................................... 5-27
5.3.4.1 - Service types.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-7

5.3.4.1.1 - 4 EPLINE mode................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.4.1.2 - Advanced mode ................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.4.1.3 - EPLAN ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.4.1.4 - EVPLINE/EVPLAN............................................................................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.4.2 - Port modes and tagging possibilities.......................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.4.2.1 - UNI-N................................................................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.4.2.2 - I-NNI ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.3.4.2.3 - E-NNI ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.4.2.4 - EtherType .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.3.4.3 - QOS parameters....................................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.3.4.3.1 - Available classes of service ............................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.3.4.3.2 - Strict priority shaping ........................................................................................................................................ 5-12
5.3.4.3.3 - Metering and policing........................................................................................................................................ 5-12
5.3.4.3.4 - Bandwidth computation examples..................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.4.4 - Services and QOS configuration.............................................................................................................................. 5-16
5.3.4.4.1 - Classification principle ...................................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.3.4.4.2 - Available classification types ............................................................................................................................ 5-18
5.3.4.4.3 - User predefined classifications .......................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.3.4.4.4 - PCP encoding .................................................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.3.3 - QOS Global configuration............................................................................................................... 5-5

5.3.4 - QOS & services configuration ........................................................................................................ 5-6
5.3.2.1 - Physical configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.3.2.2 - Advanced configuration............................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.1 - ENTERING SITE NAMES ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 - SETTING THE DATE AND TIME................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3 - CONFIGURING GIGABIT ETHERNET ........................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.3.1 - Notations used in this manual ........................................................................................................ 5-2
5.3.2 - Ethernet Port configuration............................................................................................................. 5-2
5. FINAL LINK CONFIGURATION............................................................................................................................ 5-1
4.5.7 - Testing 1+1 configuration (optional) ............................................................................................. 4-32

4.5.8 - Quality measurement ................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.5.9 - Recording configuration information............................................................................................. 4-34
4.5.6.5 - Simulating an RSL alarm......................................................................................................................................... 4-31

4.5.6.6 - Testing an external alarm......................................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.5.6.7 - Testing the alarm outputs (relays)............................................................................................................................ 4-32
Page 0-8
7.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2 - VISUAL INSPECTION ............................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.3 - TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.3.1 - Describe the symptom.................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.2 - Isolate the problem ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.3 - Fix the problem ............................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4 - DESCRIPTION OF IDU FRONT PANEL LEDS ............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.4.1 - IDU Leds......................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.4.2 - Modem Leds ................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.4.3 - Leds of the MUX64 SPDH shelf ..................................................................................................... 7-3
7.5 - ALARMS MANAGED BY THE PILOT ......................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.5.1 - Alarm summary screen................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.5.2 - Direct and indirect alarms............................................................................................................. 7-11
7.5.3 - Event log....................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.6 - TYPICAL SLF-H PILOT SCREENS IN CASE OF PROBLEM ........................................................................................ 7-11
7.6.1 - No IDU-Pilot software communication.......................................................................................... 7-11
7.6.2 - No local equipment, no remote equipment................................................................................... 7-11
7.6.3 - No local radio................................................................................................................................ 7-12
7.6.4 - No remote radio ............................................................................................................................ 7-12
7.6.5 - Low RSL ....................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.6.6 - Low transmit power ...................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.6.7 - Link established correctly but with some alarms .......................................................................... 7-14
7.6.8 - Normal link no alarms................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.7 - REPLACING AN ODU............................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.8 - REPLACING A MODEM .......................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE................................................................................................................................ 7-1
6.2.3 - "File / IDU Configuration / Local or Remote / Load" menu ............................................................. 6-4
6.2.4 - "File / Boot Firmware / Local or Remote" menu ............................................................................. 6-5
6.2.5 - "File / IDU Firmware / Local or Remote" menu .............................................................................. 6-5
6.2.6 - "File / ODU Firmware / Local or Remote" menu............................................................................. 6-6
6.2.7 - "File / Quit" menu............................................................................................................................ 6-6
6.3 - SESSION MENU ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4 - ALARMS MENU ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4.1 - "Alarms / View / Local or Remote" menu........................................................................................ 6-7
6.4.2 - "Alarms / Text Log / Local or Remote" menu ................................................................................. 6-8
6.4.3 - "Alarms /Graphical Log / Local or Remote" menu.......................................................................... 6-9
6.5 - CONFIGURATION / ALARMS MENU ......................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.6 - CONFIGURATION / MANAGEMENT NETWORK / ETHERNET PORTS AND RADIO CHANNEL / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.6.1 - Description of the Management network...................................................................................... 6-10
6.6.2 - Network configuration................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.6.3 - Wayside configuration .................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.7 - CONFIGURATION / MANAGEMENT NETWORK /ROUTES / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ............................................ 6-14
6.8 - CONFIGURATION / GIGABIT ETHERNET MENU ...................................................................................................... 6-15
6.9 - CONFIGURATION / PROTECTION / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ................................................................................ 6-15
6.10 - CONFIGURATION / ATPC / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU........................................................................................ 6-16
6.11 - CONFIGURATION /E1 TRIBUTARIES / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ........................................................................ 6-16
6.12 - CONFIGURATION / HARDWARE INVENTORY / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ........................................................... 6-16
6.13 - CONFIGURATION / PILOT MENU .......................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.14 - CONFIGURATION / RESET TO DEFAULT DATABASE / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ................................................. 6-17
6.15 - PERFORMANCE / RSL / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ............................................................................................. 6-17
6.16 - PERFORMANCE / LINK STATISTICS / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ......................................................................... 6-18
6.17 - PERFORMANCE / GIGABIT ETHERNET / GENERAL ETHERNET STATISTICS / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU............... 6-19
6.18 - PERFORMANCE / GIGABIT ETHERNET / METERING STATISTICS / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU .............................. 6-20
6.19 - PERFORMANCE / WAYSIDE / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ..................................................................................... 6-20
6.20 - PERFORMANCE / CLEAR BER STATS / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ...................................................................... 6-21
6.21 - PERFORMANCE / CLEAR/RESET ALL .................................................................................................................. 6-22
6.22 - MAINTENANCE / TX/RX FORCING MENU ............................................................................................................ 6-22
6.23 - MAINTENANCE / LOOPBACKS MENU .................................................................................................................. 6-23
6.24 - MAINTENANCE / FREQUENCY SCAN / CHANNEL 1 OR CHANNEL 2 MENU ........................................................... 6-23
6.25 - MAINTENANCE / TRY TO UNMUTE REMOTE / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ............................................................ 6-24
6.26 - MAINTENANCE / RESTRICTION / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU ............................................................................... 6-24
Page 0-9
LINK COMPOSITION .............................................................................................................................................................1

REFERENCES OF ODUS HL.................................................................................................................................................2
REFERENCES OF ODUS H .................................................................................................................................................10
REFERENCES OF ODUS NL...............................................................................................................................................19
REFERENCES OF ODUS N .................................................................................................................................................27
APPENDIX 2 - SLF-H REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................1
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS ..............................................................................................................................................1

TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................................................................................2
RECEPTION CHARACTERISTICS............................................................................................................................................3
GIGABIT ETHERNET / 2 MBIT/S ACCESS ..............................................................................................................................4
ALARMS, WAYSIDE AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERFACES .........................................................................................4
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................................................................................................4
POWER CONSUMPTION ........................................................................................................................................................5
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS..................................................................................................................................5
HEALTH CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................................................................................5
APPENDIX 1- SLF-H SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................1
7.9 - REPLACING AN IDU ............................................................................................................................................. 7-15

7.10 - REPLACING A FAN MODULE ............................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.11 - REPLACING A MUX64 SPDH SHELF .................................................................................................................. 7-15
Page 0-10
Figure 7.1 - IDU front panel Leds...................................................................................................................................... 7-2

Figure 7.2 - Alarms screen on the Pilot ............................................................................................................................. 7-4
Figure 6.1 - Equipment shelf view without SPDH extension ............................................................................................ 6-1
Figure 6.2 - Equipment shelf view with SPDH extension ................................................................................................. 6-1
Figure 6.3 - Pilot menu tree structure ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
Figure 4.1 - SLF-H ODU RSL voltage ............................................................................................................................ 4-17

Figure 4.2 - Antenna alignment ....................................................................................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4.3 - Main Pilot Screen for a 1+0 configuration Fixed modulation................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4.4 - Main Pilot Screen for a 1+0 configuration ACM modulation................................................................... 4-19
Figure 4.5 - Main Pilot Screen for a 1+1 configuration Fixed modulation................................................................... 4-19
Figure 4.6 - Main Pilot Screen for a 1+1 configuration ACM modulation................................................................... 4-20
Figure 4.7 - Local transmitter 1 and local receiver 1 active............................................................................................. 4-32
Figure 4.8 - Local transmitter1 and local receiver 2 active.............................................................................................. 4-33
Figure 4.9 - Local transmitter 2 and local receiver 2 active............................................................................................. 4-33
Figure 3.1 - IDU installation.............................................................................................................................................. 3-2

Figure 3.2 - ODU SLF-H with integrated antenna............................................................................................................. 3-4
Figure 3.3 - Polarization setting in 1+0 configuration ....................................................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.4 - ODU SLF-H mounted on pole ....................................................................................................................... 3-5
Figure 3.5 - SLF-H 1+1 configuration with coupler and integrated antenna ..................................................................... 3-6
Figure 3.6 - Polarization setting on 1+1 coupler................................................................................................................ 3-6
Figure 3.7 - Front panel of the SLF-H IDU in 1+0 configuration...................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3.8 - Front panel of the SLF-H IDU in 1+1 configuration...................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3.9 - "Serial" connector pinout ............................................................................................................................. 3-10
Figure 3.10 - Relay output electrical interface................................................................................................................. 3-11
Figure 3.11 - External alarm electrical interface.............................................................................................................. 3-11
Figure 3.12 - Cables for a terminal station....................................................................................................................... 3-16
Figure 3.13 - Cables for a relay station ............................................................................................................................ 3-16
Figure 3.14 - Front panel of MUX64 SPDH Unit............................................................................................................ 3-18
Figure 3.15 - SLF-H 1+1 IDU ......................................................................................................................................... 3-23
Figure 1.1 - SLF-H 1+0 terminal ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2

Figure 1.2 - SLF-H 1+1 Terminal (HSB) .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
Figure 1.3 - Minimum and maximum channel frequencies ............................................................................................... 1-4
Figure 1.4 - SLF-H block diagram..................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Figure 1.5 - 1+1 Hot Stand By configuration .................................................................................................................... 1-9
Figure 1.6 - 1+1 Space diversity configuration................................................................................................................ 1-10
Figure 1.7 - 1+1 Frequency diversity configuration ........................................................................................................ 1-11
FIGURES
Page 0-11
Table 7-1 - Meaning of the Wayside alarm ....................................................................................................................... 7-5

Table 7-2 - Meaning of radio alarms ................................................................................................................................. 7-5
Table 7-3 - Meaning of the SPDH alarm ........................................................................................................................... 7-5
Table 7-4 - Meaning of Fan and Temperature alarms........................................................................................................ 7-6
Table 7-5 - Meaning of Modem alarms ............................................................................................................................. 7-7
Table 7-6 - Meaning of ODU alarms ................................................................................................................................. 7-8
Table 7-7 - Meaning of Gigabit Ethernet alarms ............................................................................................................... 7-9
Table 7-8 - Meaning of E1 Tributary alarms ..................................................................................................................... 7-9
Table 7-9 - Meaning of External alarms .......................................................................................................................... 7-10
Table 5-1 - Default configuration of the alarm relays...................................................................................................... 5-43
Table 4-1 - Configuration compatibility .......................................................................................................................... 4-14

Table 4-2 - Configuration compatibility .......................................................................................................................... 4-15
Table 3-1 - 4-pin "POWER" connector pinout ................................................................................................................ 3-10

Table 3-2 - "Alarm in/out" connector pinout ................................................................................................................... 3-12
Table 3-3 - Ethernet port pinout....................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Table 3-4 - Characteristics of the Gigabit Ethernet optical interface............................................................................... 3-13
Table 3-5 - TRIB 1-8 connector pinout............................................................................................................................ 3-14
Table 3-6 - TRIB 9-16 connector pinout.......................................................................................................................... 3-15
Table 3-7 - Cable References for SLF-H ......................................................................................................................... 3-17
Table 3-8 - SFP module references for SLF-H ................................................................................................................ 3-18
Table 3-9 - TRIB16E1 connector pinout for the MUX64 SPDH unit ............................................................................. 3-21
Table 3-10 - Cable References for MUX64 SPDH unit................................................................................................... 3-22
TABLES
Wide transmit power range in steps of 0.5 dB
1 management interface with two 10/100BaseT Ethernet ports connected by an integrated

switch
1 VT100 configuration RS232 interface
Page 1-1
5 external alarm inputs and 3 configurable relay outputs
1 Wayside 10/100BaseT Ethernet channel
Other features available:
Full compliance with ETSI standards
Integrated measurement of bit and packet errors rate and receive signal level
Full software control
XPIC mode (for 28MHz and 56MHz radio channels only)
Radio channel: 7MHz, 14 MHz, 28 MHz, 56 MHz
ACM Modulation: QPSK (two different profiles), 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM
(three different profiles)
Automatic Tx Power Control (ATPC algorithm)
Fixed Modulation: QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM
Synthesizer frequency step: 250 kHz
Advanced switching and quality of service configuration for Ethernet traffic
4 Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces + 80 optional E1 ports
Main telecommunication radio bands covered: 6, 7, 8, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 32 and 38 GHz
SLF-H equipment is available in unprotected 1+0 configuration, in protected 1+1 configuration (Hot
Stand By, Space diversity, Frequency diversity) and in 2+0 configuration (XPIC, Frequency Diversity)
to double the radio channel capacity.
SLF-H proposes ACM (Adaptive Coding & Modulation) configurations thanks to which the system can
automatically and dynamically change of profile (i.e. of modulation scheme) based on the radio
channel quality, so that if offers both the best throughput and the best robustness at any time.
The SLF-H range of microwave radio links provides highly reliable point to point communication with
low installation costs in different frequency bands. This high-capacity range of microwave frequencies
is characterized by excellent flexibility capabilities in terms of transmission capacity and of frequency
bands used. It allows simultaneous or independent transport of Giga Ethernet data and 2Mbit/s links
by PDH/Ethernet multiplexing.
1.1 - INTRODUCTION
1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
0BSYSTEM DESCRIPTION
An optional TNM4 card (daughter card) inserted on the mother board and providing 16
ports, E1.
A hot pluggable U MODEM providing the cable interface with the ODU; in 1+1 and 2+0
configurations, two Modems are installed in the chassis, each one being associated to an
ODU.
A hot pluggable FAN module with three speed-controlled fans to cool the IDU.
x
x
An ODU (Outdoor Unit) providing the cable interface with the IDU. It consists of one transmitter
and one receiver and performs frequency conversion and signal amplification.
A Backplane connecting the various IDU units.

An INT mother board providing the various IDU accesses: Giga Ethernet, Wayside, external
alarm and relay outputs, serial management ports, PC access.
An IDU (Indoor Unit) composed of:

x
Page 1-2
IDU
Modem
ODU
Fan
Figure 1.1 - SLF-H 1+0 terminal
Integrated antenna
A 1+0 terminal using an integrated antenna is presented on Figure 1.1 - SLF-H 1+0 terminal and a
1+1 terminal using a coupler is presented on Figure 1.2.
All SLF-H configurations are built from standard units installed in a 19" 1U chassis.
1.2.1 - System composition
1.2 - DESCRIPTION
An optional MUX64 SPDH shelf constituted of a "MUX64 Extension SPDH" card providing
64 x 2 Mbit/s ports.
UFE-16E1 (253302812): Optional 16E1 extension card (TNM4)
UFF P2 (253183126): hot swap fan module.
UFE-RL (253311134): Optional 32E1 extension chassis
UFE-R 64E1 (253199728): Optional 64E1 extension chassis
1.2.5 - Optional MUX64 SPDH version
Page 1-3
UFC-HX P2 (253199822): fixed or ACM QPSK to 256QAM 7 MHz to 56 MHz XPIC

support, software selectable
1.2.4 - Fan version
UFC-HW P2 (253115222): fixed or ACM QPSK to 256QAM 7 MHz to 56 MHz, software

selectable
1.2.3 - Modem version
UFX-SP P2 (253302846): GE chassis
1.2.2 - IDU version
Figure 1.2 - SLF-H 1+1 Terminal (HSB)
Page 1-4
7 MHz radio channel
14 MHz radio channel
ODU bandwith
2.5 MHz
Fmax14 = FmaxODU-2.5
5 MHz
Fmax14 = FmaxODU-5
10 MHz
Fmax28 = FmaxODU-10
20 MHz
Fmax56 = FmaxODU-20
Fmax (ODU)
For a 56 MHz radio channel, the minimum frequency is: FminODU + 20 MHz and the maximum
frequency is: FmaxODU - 20 MHz
Figure 1.3 - Minimum and maximum channel frequencies
2.5 MHz
Fmin7 = FminODU+2.5
5 MHz
Fmin14 = FminODU+5
10 MHz
Fmin28 = FminODU+10
20 MHz
Fmin56 = FminODU+20
Fmin (ODU)
The following diagram summarizes the rules used to determine the minimum and maximum
depending on the channel type used: see figure below.
The minimum and maximum channel frequencies depend on the channel occupied bandwidth and
therefore on the capacity.
The ODU minimum and maximum frequencies indicated in this list correspond to the duplexer useful
bandwidth.
The complete list of ODUs is given in APPENDIX 2
Each frequency band is divided into several sub-bands. For each sub-band, there is one Low Band
ODU and one high band ODU.
SLF-H equipment is available in the following frequency bands: 6 GHz, 7 GHz, 8 GHz, 11 GHz,
13 GHz, 15 GHz, 18 GHz, 23 GHz, 26 GHz, 32 GHz and 38 GHz.
1.2.6 - ODU Versions
For a 7 MHz radio channel, the minimum frequency is: FminODU + 2.5 MHz and the maximum
frequency is: FmaxODU - 2.5 MHz
Page 1-5
Page 1-6
Figure 1.4 - SLF-H block diagram
The SLF-H block diagram is given below.
Downlink:
x The modulated receive IF signal (140 MHz).
x The downlink telemetry signal consisting of a 10 MHz carrier amplitude modulated by a 19200 bit/s
digital signal.
Uplink:
x ODU remote power supply (-48 V DC).
x The modulated transmit IF signal (350 MHz).
x The uplink telemetry signal consisting of a 5.5 MHz carrier amplitude modulated by a 19200 bit/s
digital signal.
The IDU-ODU interface consists of a single coaxial cable in 1+0 system. This cable transports the
following frequency multiplexed signals:
1.3.1 - SLF-H block diagrams
1.3 - SLF-H FEATURES
A Gigabit Ethernet Switch providing up to 4 Giga Ethernet interfaces equipped with optical or
electrical SFP modules.
An interface with an optional TNM4 card providing 16 x 2 Mbit/s G703 channels; the TNM4 card
acts as 2 Mbit/s line interface and tributary multiplexer / demultiplexer.
An extension interface located on the optional TNM4 for connecting an optional MUX64 SPDH
chassis offering up to 64 2 Mbit/s G703 channels, leading to a total of up to 80 2 Mbit/s
tributaries.
A network management interface compliant with SNMP protocol. This management interface
includes 2 Ethernet ports. It communicates with the remote network management interface via
an internal service channel (TSL). Once the interface has been configured, it acts as router for
the network management traffic.
An interface with 5 external alarm inputs and 3 configurable relay outputs.
A 10/100BaseT Ethernet Wayside channel
An RS232 interface to configure the installation
140 MHz I/Q Demodulator and analog filtering
De-mapper
LDPC decoder (from which the BER is estimated)
Descrambler
A DC-DC power supply, providing the tertiary voltage for the whole IDU (+3.3 V). In 1+1
protected and 2+0 systems, the unprotected part of the IDU is powered in parallel by the two
power supplies from the two cable interfaces. A hot swap feature allows the Modem to be
plugged in and out while powered up.
Digital filter
Timing and Carrier recovery

Adaptive equalizer
ADC
A 140 MHz demodulator including:
Uplink telemetry (5.5 MHz)
Scrambler
LDPC coder
Mapper
Digital filter
DAC
350 MHz I/Q Modulator and analog filtering
A 350 MHz modulator including:
Page 1-7
The ODU power supply

The microcontroller which controls the ODU and communicates with the IDU
x
x
Receive IF at 140 MHz
Downlink telemetry (10 MHz) which carries the information returned by the ODU (in
particular alarms, receive signal level).
Page 1-8
This optional chassis provides an interface via the TNM4 card allowing to propose 64 x 2 Mbit/s
G703 additional ports; this card provides a function of 2 Mbit/s line interface and a function of tributary
multiplexer/demultiplexer.
1.3.5 - MUX64 SPDH shelf features
The duplexer filter
The receiver including two frequency conversions (140 MHz IF output)
Transmit IF which is a carrier at 350 MHz frequency
Downlink telemetry (10 MHz)
ODU power supply (-48 V)
Uplink telemetry (5.5 MHz) which carries the ODU control signals
140 MHz Receive IF output
350 MHz transmit IF input
Power supply input (-48 V)
The IDU cable Interface which is the reverse of the Modem interface:
The transmitter which includes two frequency conversions. The frequency synthesis step is
250 kHz
The ODU, which is capacity independent, is an integrated unit consisting of:
1.3.4 - ODU features
Frequency multiplexing is used to carry the following 5 signals on a coaxial cable:
Cable interface with the ODU.
The Modem, which is frequency independent, performs the following functions:
1.3.3 - Modem features
A Microprocessor controlling the system and communicating with the ODU, the remote IDU, the
SNMP agent and the Pilot software.
The IDU, which is frequency independent, consists of:
1.3.2 - IDU features
Modem
Slave
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
Slave
ODU
Master
ODU
Figure 1.5 - 1+1 Hot Stand By configuration
C
O
Master U
P
L
E
ODU R
Slave
ODU
Modem
Slave
Modem
Master
INT
Page 1-9
The active ODU can be forced using the Pilot interface (for maintenance purpose for instance). Changing
this system parameter leads to less than 1s of hit and it remains forced until the user selects the
automatic mode back.
The Master/Slave state can be forced using the Pilot interface (for maintenance purpose for instance).
Changing these system parameters leads to less than 1s of hit and it remains forced until the user selects
the automatic mode back.
When a hardware failure is detected on the Slave Modem or the muted ODU, no action is taken. The link
is still up because the active Master works properly. No error occurs.
When a hardware failure is detected on the active transmitter, it is muted and the other one is un-muted
and become active, so that the active transmitter has no hardware problem and so the link is kept up.
This switch leads to less than 1s of hit.
Once the fault is cleared and if the Revertive automatic switching is activated, the active ODU is
switched automatically to get back the least loss Tx path.
When a hardware failure is detected on the Master Modem, Master and Slave states are swapped, so
that the new Master Modem has no hardware problem. Additionally, the ODU associated to the broken
Modem is muted and the other one is un-muted. Thanks to these actions, the link is kept up.
Once the Slave Modem card is repaired and if the Revertive automatic switching is activated, the active
ODU may be switched automatically to get back the least loss Tx path.
When a dissymmetric coupler is used, the path that leads to the least losses should be associated to the
Main channel (the channel 1, physically the one at the bottom).
When using such a coupler, the user might want to activate the Revertive automatic switching mode,
which makes the system come automatically back to the path with the least losses when the hardware
state allows it. This provides the best transmit power, and so the best link budget.
Only one transmitter is active at a time, the other is muted.

Active ODU is independent of the Master" configuration (meaning a Slave can be the active ODU).
1.4.1.1 - Transmitter operation & performances
In that system configuration, there is no radio diversity. Only the hardware (Modems and ODUs) is
protected.
In an equipment, one Modem-ODU couple is defined as Master", the other couple is defined as Slave.
INT
Modem
Master
1.4.1 - 1+1 Hot Stand By
1.4 - PROTECTED CONFIGURATIONS
Modem
Slave
Slave
Slave
Modem
Slave
Modem
Master
Figure 1.6 - 1+1 Space diversity configuration
ODU
ODU
ODU
Master
ODU
Master
INT
Page 1-10
When a hardware failure is detected on the active ODU, it is muted and the other one is un-muted and
become active, so that the active ODU has no hardware problem and so the link is kept up.
that the new Master Modem has no hardware problem. Additionally, the ODU associated to the broken
Modem is muted and the other one is un-muted. Thanks to these actions, the link is kept up.
Only one transmitter is active at a time, the other is muted.

Active transmitter is independent of the Master" configuration (meaning a Slave can be the active
ODU).
In that system configuration, there is radio protection using space diversity (two independent radio paths
are used with one active transmitter and two active receivers; this greatly improves the link availability).
The hardware (Modems and ODUs) is protected as well.
In an equipment, one Modem-ODU couple is defined as Master" the other couple is defined as Slave.
INT
Modem
Master
1.4.2 - 1+1 Space diversity
It is also possible to force the selected receiver path (either from the Master or the Slave). This allows the
user to verify that both receivers work properly, during system installation for instance: this is the
"Maintenance Rx forcing" mode. In that case, the switching is errorless. The system state remains forced
until the user selects the automatic mode back.
When a hardware failure is detected on the Slave Modem or ODU, no action is taken. The link is still up
thanks to the Master path. No error occurs.
When a hardware failure is detected on the Master ODU, no action is taken. The link is still up thanks to
the Slave ODU that is still receiving. The data will now come from the Slave receiver. No error occurs.
that the new Master Modem has no hardware problem.
By default, the selected path in the receiver equipment passes through the Master Modem.
On the receive side, both receivers are active and receive the same signal from the radio.
1.4.1.2 - Receiver operation & performances
Modem
Slave
Slave
Slave
Modem
Slave
Modem
Master
Figure 1.7 - 1+1 Frequency diversity configuration
ODU
F2 / F2
ODU
ODU
Master
Master
F1 / F1
ODU
INT
Page 1-11
In that system configuration, there is radio protection using frequency diversity (two different frequencies
are used: two active transmitters and two active receivers, one transmitter being associated to one
receiver; this greatly improves the link availability). The hardware (Modems and ODUs) is protected as
well.
INT
Modem
Master
1.4.3 - 1+1 Frequency diversity
At each airframe, the system checks whether the data coming from the Master and the Slave contains bit
errors or not.
If the Master has errors whereas the Rx Slave is clean, then the system selects the airframe from the
Slave. This switching is of course errorless.
On the receive side, both receivers are active and get independent signals (from independent radio
paths) carrying the same data.
The active ODU can be forced using the Pilot interface (for maintenance purpose for instance). Changing
these system parameters leads to less than 1s of hit and it remains forced until the user selects the
automatic mode back.
because the active Master works properly. No error occurs.
Page 1-12
At each airframe, the system checks whether the data coming from the Master and the Slave contains bit
errors or not.
If the Master has errors whereas the Slave is clean, then the system selects the airframe from the Slave.
This switching is of course errorless.
On the receive side, both receivers are active and get independent signals (from the two emitted
frequencies) carrying the same data.
the Slave ODU that is still emitting. No error occurs.
When a hardware failure is detected on the Master (Modem or ODU), Master and Slave states are
swapped, so that the new Master Modem has no hardware problem.
Both Master and Slave transmitters are active; they emit the exactly same data at two different
frequencies.
In an equipment, one Modem-ODU couple is defined as Master" the other couple is defined as Slave.
Page 1-13
Four parameters are configurable: the maximum profile, the GE minimum profile, the adaptive tx power, and
the ACM 1+1 mode. The parameters are available in the capacity configuration window which is show below
(click on the capacity bar on top of Pilot software main screen to open it).
See 2 for more details concerning the configuration of the quality of Ethernet service.
See below a synthetic illustration of ACM:
In ACM configuration, the system is able to change automatically and dynamically parameters of the
transmitted signal to best match to the radio channel quality.
The idea consists in defining several ACM profiles characterized by a modulation scheme and an efficiency
of error correcting code. The system will move from an ACM profile to another according to the signal quality
estimated at the receiver end.
In order to offer a smooth and smart adaptation to the channel capacity at anytime, the SLF-H product offers
up to 9 ACM profiles.
The highest profile offered is user-configurable and will also depend on the SW license.
The lowest profile will depend on the number of PDH tributaries used. Please refer to the Table 4-2.
The changes of ACM profile do not generate any bit error and can handle flat fading rates greater than
100dB/s as well as strong selective fading.
When the ACM profile is changed, the effective data rate is modified accordingly. For example, when the
modulation scheme decreases and/or when the efficiency of the code is increased, the available throughput
being able to pass through the radio channel decreases; as a trade-off, the system becomes more robust
regarding radio disturbances and so keeps the link up without any bit errors on the still available traffic.
Only the rate allocated to the Ethernet traffic is modified to adapt to the current ACM profile. All the other
tributaries (PDH, management) keep the exactly same rate whatever is the current ACM profile.
If the quality of service (QoS) is activated, the Ethernet shaping is automatically adapted, making it possible to
guarantee the quality constraints on the different priority Ethernet flows.
1.5 - ACM CONFIGURATION
Page 1-14
GE Tx mute on profile below:
A modulation and an Ethernet bandwidth correspond to each profile.

The field value GE Bandwidth depend on radio channel bandwidth, ACM profile and number of E1 used.
Bandwidth is expressed in L2 Ethernet (Ethernet frame rate out IFG and preamble).
Min GE and Max profiles can be selected among up to 9 ACM profiles.

The choice of minimum and maximum profiles is done by the next configuration window:
Maximum profile:
The maximum profile defines the ACM profile above which the system will never go.
Page 1-15
When enabled, the max output power of the radio transmitter is adapted depending on the current modulation
scheme so that it always offers the highest reachable output power.
Under channel degradation, the ACM profile is changed down as soon as a predefined threshold is crossed.
Then the output power is improved up.
Under channel improvement, the output power is reduced as soon as a predefined threshold is crossed. Then
the ACM profile is changed up.
This strategy ensures that:

- system can face extremely fast fading events in an optimized way, making it very robust regarding any
radio phenomenon
- applicable ETSI class (up to class 6B) allows the customer to comply with all requirements of local
radio regulators and make it easier to get radio licenses
As a trade-off, the max output power is limited to this offered by the highest modulation and remains the same
for all other modulation schemes.
When disabled, the max output power of the radio transmitter is fixed at the max output power offered by the
highest selected modulation scheme offered within the several ACM profiles (modulation of Maximum profile).
Under channel degradation, the ACM profile is changed down as soon as a predefined threshold is crossed.
Under channel improvement, the ACM profile is changed up as soon as a predefined threshold is crossed.
ACM Adaptive TX power:
The minimum GE profile corresponds to the ACM profile under which the Ethernet traffic will be cut. It is
therefore possible to adjust the parameters of Ethernet QoS based on the bandwidth corresponding to the
selected minimum profile (adjustment of the metering or of the shaping of the strict priority class).
However, the system can still continue moving down of modulation so it can keep the other tributaries up (E1,
Wayside, TSL) as long as possible in case of strong radio disturbance; only the Ethernet will be cut off.
Page 1-16
- Max throughput mode:

The highest profile between this allowed by the Master modem and this allowed by the Slave modem is used.
Therefore, if the channel quality of the Master is degraded whereas the Slave one is still good, the system
wont move down of profile; both Master and Slave will remain at the highest profile.
The system first switches without error between the reception of the Master and of the Slave before changing
of ACM profile.
This solution provides to the user an optimized using of the available channel capacity.
Exemple:
As 1+1 configuration is generally associated with non symmetrical couplers, the receive signal level of the
standby receiver is lower than the main receiver. So, in case of ACM, two strategies are available: maximum
throughput mode with lower protection, or maximum protection mode.
In 1+1 configuration, the profile to be used by the remote transmitter(s) is decided by the local equipment
according to the quality of its two received signals.
ACM mode (1+1 protection):
Note that the transmit power displayed on the Pilot software is always the one configured for the maximum
modulation, even if current modulation is below that.
The maximum transmit power for each modulation, ODU type, and radio frequency is available in the
performances sheets.
When ACM Adaptive TX power is enabled, the transmit power configuration remains the same as when it is
disabled. The configuration is always performed for the configured Maximum profile modulation.
When changing profile, applied transmit power will be equal to the configured transmit power plus a power
increase corresponding to the difference of maximum transmit power between maximum modulation and
current modulation. This power increase depends on the ODU type and radio frequency used.
For example, with 15GHz ODU H, if the maximum profile has a modulation scheme 256QAM, and the
configured transmit power is 17dBm, the current transmit powers in the different modulations will be as
follows:
256QAM:
17 dBm
128QAM:
18 dBm
64QAM:
18 dBm
32QAM:
23 dBm
16QAM:
23 dBm
QPSK:
26 dBm
This strategy ensures that:

- the system always offers the best and highest output power, leading to an improved overall link
budget
- the right output power is always used for each modulation scheme, making sure that the
performances are good for each one of them
As a trade-off, changing the output power needs some time. Therefore, the optimized working of ACM with
adaptive output power is achieved under rather slower fading events.
Also, the ETSI standard specifies that the applicable ETSI class in ACM mode must be supported by all the
ACM profiles. Because of the high max output power offered by the QPSK modulation scheme, the system
can only comply with the class 2 (whatever is the selected maximum profile).
Page 1-17
The 2+0 configuration allows the system to double its transmission capacity.
To do so, it uses two different radio channels independently. This is achieved either by using two different
frequencies (2+0 Frequency Diversity) or two different polarizations at the same frequency (2+0 XPIC). 2+0
modes are available in the protection configuration window (accessible from the protection button on the main
window of the Pilot software). Bellow is a screenshot of the window.
1.6 - 2+0 CONFIGURATIONS
- Max protection mode:

The lowest profile between this allowed by the modem Master and this allowed by the modem Slave is used.
Therefore, if the channel quality of the Slave is degraded whereas the Master one is still good, the system
wont remain at the highest profile; both Master and Slave will move down of profile.
The system first changes of profile before switching between the reception of the Master and of the Slave.
Exemple:
All E1 on one channel

Channel 1 Channel 2
0
0
2
0
4
0
8
0
16
0
32
0
48
0
64
0
80
0
E1 split over the two channels E1 duplicated over the two channels
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 2
0
0
0
0
2
0
2
2
2*
2*
4
4
4*
4*
8
8
8*
8*
16
16
16
16
32
32
32
16
48
48
32
32
64
64
48
32
80
80
* E1 lost if the other channel is lost
Page 1-18
In that case, the system uses two different frequencies: one for each of the two radio channels.
1.6.1 - 2+0 FD
The Ethernet traffic is split over the two channels in all modes. The available total Ethernet bandwidth depends
on the number of E1 on each channel. To compute Ethernet bandwidth, refer to the performances sheets to
find the right configuration for each channel and simply sum the values obtained for both channels.
Since the ACM feature can be used in 2+0 configurations, this means that the radio bandwidth can change
dynamically and independently on the two channels. In order to guarantee an optimized using of the available
bandwidth at any time, the Ethernet traffic is split over the two channels based on a proprietary and patented
solution, ensuring the QoS and keeping the frame order.
0
2
4
8
16
32
48
64
80
Nb of E1
- All E1 on one channel:

Every PDH tributaries are carried over the same radio channel (channel 1).
- E1 split over the two channels:
In this mode, the PDH tributaries are split over the two radio channels. This can be relevant especially
in ACM mode to make the system able to use lower ACM profile and so offer a better overall link
availability.
- E1 duplicated over the two channels:
This mode is a protected configuration for the PDH tributaries. They are all duplicated and carried over
the two radio channels. On the receive side, the system will forward the incoming radio traffic from the
receiver that offers the best performances. This mode improves the PDH availability. As a trade off,
the available Ethernet throughput is reduced.
In 2+0 configurations (either XPIC or FD), three modes are available for the PDH traffic:
INT
Modem 2
Modem 1
ODU
2
ODU
F2 / F2
ODU
F1 / F1
ODU
Modem 2
Modem 1
INT
Modem2
XPIC
ODU
H
ODU
ODU
ODU
Modem2
XPIC
Modem1
XPIC
INT5
XPIC
H
Page 1-19
Due to physical limitations (antenna cross polar discrimination, antenna alignment, radio propagation
conditions ), the two signals will interfere with each other, making it mandatory to implement a cross
polarisation interference canceller at the receiver side. Thanks to that, the receiver sensitivity performances
are equivalent to those of non XPIC modes.
This is achieved by using a specific architecture on the modem card.
This configuration offers therefore two radio channels using the same path and at the same
frequency. These two channels differ by the used polarization of the electromagnetic waves.
INT5
Modem1
XPIC
XPIC requires the use of specific modem cards including an Interference canceller ASIC (XPIC algorithm) and
uses 2 ODUs linked to a double-polarization antenna.
1.6.2 - 2+0 XPIC
No XPIC
Page 1-20
Page 2-1
The modulation of the equipment Modem(s) can be configured into fixed or ACM (Adaptive Coding &
Modulation) mode.
In ACM, the operator defines the range of profiles which can be used by the modems. A profile is a
combination of a modem coding gain and a modulation. The higher the profile is, the higher the
modulation order is, and the lower the code strength is. The available radio bandwidth for GE traffic
depends on the current profile used.
The Ethernet bandwidth will be able to vary from a maximum value (Bandwidth GE max) to a minimal
value (Bandwidth GE min) corresponding to the maximum and minimum profiles defined for the ACM.
The interest of ACM is to offer a transmission without error for the priority traffic even in case of bad radio
conditions. This result in an increased availability for higher priority traffic compared to fixed modulation
mode. Lower priority traffic will still pass through when possible, resulting in a lower availability for this
kind of traffic.
2.2.3 - Available Ethernet radio bandwidth (ACM)
Equipment in its default configuration accepts frame size from 64 to 2048 bytes. If the Ethernet frames
received on the GE ports are larger than 2048 bytes, "Jumbo frame" mode must be configured. When
jumbo frame is enabled, frame size can go up to 10000 bytes.
2.2.2 - Jumbo frames
The "radio port" allows the radio transmission between the two terminals. Since the radio transmission
bandwidth is limited, this is the main point of congestion for the Ethernet transmission. The available
bandwidth depends on the radio configuration (modulation, radio channel bandwidth) and the number of
optional E1 channels activated. ACM and 2+0 configurations (XPIC) also affect the available bandwidth.
GE ports are the Gigabit Ethernet transmission accesses; they can be associated with either optical
interfaces (SX or LX), or electrical interfaces (10/100/1000BaseT).
Electrical SFP ports can handle throughputs of 10/100/1000 Mbit/s in Full or Half duplex, except for
1000 Mbit/s which must be in Full duplex. The rate and mode can be auto negotiated with the remote
equipment connected to the Ethernet port.
2.2.1 - Definition
2.2 - PORTS
SLF-H embeds a full layer 2 switch with advanced QOS (Quality Of Service) features.
4 GE port are available on the front panel of each IDU. An additional internal port allows the switch to
send traffic over the radio to the other side of the link.
Several configurations allow controlling services connectivity within the switch.
MEF EPLINE/EVPLINE/EPLAN and EVPLAN modes are available.
Equipment is capable of performing SVLAN tagging (push/pop/keep) according to flexible classification
criteria.
4 classes of services are available to classify traffic and enforce the QOS. Metering can be used to limit
the rate of certain flows.
2.1 - INTRODUCTION
This chapter introduces the Gigabit Ethernet functions available in equipment. It is recommended to read this
chapter before going further into Ethernet QOS configuration. Detailed description of the configuration can be
found in chapter 5.3 -)
2. GIGABIT ETHERNET FUNCTION
1BGIGABIT ETHERNET FUNCTION
Page 2-2
E_NNI port mode:

E_NNI (External Network to Network Interface) ports are equivalent to I_NNI, except that the priority bits
are not trusted, and thus redefined and rewritten when frame ingress the equipment. Except from
priority rewrite, no tagging action will be performed.
I_NNI port mode:

I_NNI (Internal Network to Network Interface) ports are supposed to be inside the network. Frames
which ingress these ports should be SVLAN tagged. Frames which egress these ports will keep existing
tag. No tagging action will be performed. Internal means the port works in trust mode, and will use the
priority bits inside SVLAN tag of ingress frames to determine QOS parameters (classification, drop
precedence). 802.1ad PCP encoding table is used for that. Priority bits won't be rewritten in this case.
UNI port mode:

UNI (User to Network Interface) ports are tagging points in a network. Frame which ingress the
equipment on these ports will receive an additional SVLAN tag (push tag). Frames which egress the
equipment on these ports will loose a tag (pop tag). Ingress frame may already contain a VLAN tag, in
this case 802.1 QinQ is performed.
In this mode, frames are switched based on SVLAN Id. Each port can be involved in one or more
SVLAN services. Tagging action can be performed. Different ports mode are available.
2.3.2.2 - EVPLINE/EVPLAN modes
In this mode, frames can be switched to any other port configured inside the EPLAN. No tagging action
is performed. QOS is performed on all ports involved in the EPLAN.
2.3.2.1 - EPLAN mode
In advanced mode, each port (GE ports and radio port) can be involved either in EPLAN mode or
EVPLINE/EVPLAN modes. The difference between the two modes is mainly the VLAN awareness.
2.3.2 - Advanced mode
In this mode, no tag action is performed. Frames remain unmodified, and are only transmitted to the
other side of the link. Each GE port is connected to the radio port: GE ports are PVE (Private Virtual
Edge). Frames can't be transmitted between two local GE ports, but only between a GE port and the
radio. However, frames can be transmitted from radio port to any GE port. For example a frame can
enter equipment on port 1, be transmitted over the link, and leave remote equipment on port 2
(depending on the remote equipment forwarding database).
No Tag is added on the frames, but frames can already contain one or more VLAN tag.
QOS is only performed on the radio port in this mode. GE ports are supposed to have enough available
bandwidth to avoid making egress congestions.
2.3.1 - 4 EPLINE mode
Three main modes corresponding to different topologies can be implemented.
2.3 - TOPOLOGIES
If the radio condition requires a lower profile than the minimum configured, the GE transmission is cut on
the radio port (all frames dropped).
Description
Classify all frames that ingress on a
port
Classify based on UP field of CVLAN
tag of ingress frames
(CVLAN EtherType must be 0x8100)
Classify based on VLAN Id field of
CVLAN tag of ingress frames
Id can be a single value or a range of
values
(CVLAN EtherType must be 0x8100)
Classify based on VLAN Id field of
SVLAN tag of ingress frames
(SVLAN EtherType can be configured)
Classify based on one of each of the 8
user predefined filters which can be:
- MAC address
- IP DSCP field
- IP protocol
- IP addresses
- UDP/TCP ports
all
EVPLINE/EVPLAN
all
all
all
Accessible in
topology
UNI
I_NNI, E_NNI
UNI
UNI
UNI
Accessible in
port mode
Page 2-3
Each port can be configured in a given classification (but two different classifications can't be used on the
same port). Default modes can be used to classify remaining frames.
User predefined
SVLAN Id base
CVLAN Id based
User priority based
Port based
Classification
The classification (assignment of Ethernet streams to a SVLAN service and a CoS) can be performed on
several types of criteria:
The quality of services uses 4 queues on each port. These queues are known as traffic class (TC). The
four queues are named TC0, TC1, TC2, and TC3. Each TC has a different priority:
- TC3: Very high priority traffic class: Strict priority
- TC2: High priority traffic class:
Weighted Round Robin 16
- TC1: Medium priority traffic class:
- TC0: Low priority traffic class :
2.4.2 - Frames classification
The transport of the Ethernet frames induces two problems which are the traffic congestion on egress
port (mainly the radio port) and the time of routing of the frames through the equipment (latency time, ie.
the delay between the instant a frame is sent on one side of the link, and the instant this frame is received
on the other side).
Four classes of service are available on each port of the equipment. When congestion occurs, the priority
of different classes will allow prioritizing part of the traffic.
When no congestion occurs, no frames are dropped, all frames egress the equipment as fast as possible.
When congestion occurs, frame with higher priority will be transmitted first, and if possible, lower priority
frames will be transmitted if there is enough bandwidth left.
The quality of service makes it possible to allocate guaranteed rates for Ethernet flows, to support the
priority frames in the treatment of the congestion and to reduce their latency time.
2.4.1 - Generalities
2.4 - SERVICE QUALITY (QOS)
Page 2-4
Flow control can be used to prevent loosing frames when congestion happens.
In case of congestion, equipment will send pause frames from GE ports, to stop incoming streams.
When congestion is solved, incoming streams are allowed back. The congestion detection is based on
the number of frame waiting to be handled by the radio port. When the number of waiting frame
crosses a certain threshold (before total buffering capacity is reached) pause frames are sent. A
second threshold (lower) ends the pause to resume transmission.
For the flow control to work properly, the equipments connected to GE ports must be able to handle
pause frame, and be configured to do so (the flow control is often disabled by default on network
equipments).
Flow control will only send pause frames out of GE ports. Transmission between local and remote
radio ports can't be shutdown by flow control mechanism.
2.4.4.3 - Flow control
To be able to manage the congestion, it is necessary to limit the rate on the egress port (with a port
shaping) in order to guarantee that egress frames won't be dropped after QOS enforcement point. For
the radio port, the bandwidth limit comes from the radio capacity. For GE port, limitation comes from
port speed configuration (or negotiation). The shaping is activated when QOS mode is enabled. When
QOS mode is disabled, frames will be dropped randomly in the modem queue, and no QOS will be
performed.
When QOS mode is enabled, the shaping is automatically configured by the equipment according to
its current configuration.
For GE ports, shaping can be disabled, or manually configured if needed. When GE port shaping is
disabled, or configured manually to an excessive value, no QOS can be enforced on frames that
egress on this port. Automatic shaping mode for GE ports configure automatically the port shaping to
the highest safe value, making sure that no frames will be dropped after the shaper, and thus ensuring
QOS proper enforcement.
2.4.4.2 - Limitation of port bandwidth
- Limitation of the output rate on port.

- Implementation of a GE flow control (Flow Control).
- Destruction (Drop) of frames (with different drop criteria).
Several actions are involved in the congestion handling:
2.4.4.1 - Description
2.4.4 - Congestion handling
For each classification (or flow), it's possible to measure ingress rate. A contractual limit, CIR (Committed
Information Rate) can be defined.
When metering mode is enabled, the ingress rate of each flow will be monitored. Frames in flows below
the CIR limit will be marked green. Frames in flows above the CIR limit will be marked partly green and
partly yellow (rate of green frames within flow will be equal to CIR).
On egress side, frame color marking will influence frame drop decision in case of congestion (see
chapters below).
2.4.3 - Metering
Classification is performed on ingress side, and applied on egress side. This means for example that if a
classification is defined on port 1, frame that ingress on port 1 will be classified in the destination port TC
according to port 1 classification. Congestion handling, and priority enforcement (scheduling) will be
enforced on egress side (for example on another port, or radio port, according to frame destination
address).
Page 2-5
In fixed modulation mode, the total CIR available is equal to the available Ethernet bandwidth on the
destination port. For GE port, the maximum CIR is equal to the PIR, which is the port bandwidth
(configured or negotiated). For radio port, if the radio capacity is in fixed modulation mode, the CIR is
also equal to the PIR, which is the available Ethernet bandwidth on the link (depending on the
configuration). For radio port if the radio capacity is in ACM mode the PIR is the bandwidth of the
highest profile, and the CIR is equal to the bandwidth of the minimum profile.
2.4.4.4.4 - CIR/PIR values
A rate higher than the CIR is allowed for flows which are not classified in the Very High Priority.
The possible maximum rate PIR (Peak Information Rate) of a flow is equal to the bandwidth of the
destination port.
PIR
In the end, the result will be that when a given TC is under congestion, yellow frames will be
dropped, and green frames will pass. When there is no congestion, all frames will pass.
Thus the green frames (coming from streams that respect their CIR) will not be dropped.
The Very High Priority queue does not accept yellow frames. If a yellow frame is classified in this
queue, the frame will be dropped automatically (even if the queue is empty).
The other queues can accept both yellow and green frames. Green frames are always accepted.
Yellow frames are queued only if the destination queue is empty enough. Internally there is a
queue level threshold. If the queue level is under the threshold, yellow frames are accepted. If the
queue level is above the threshold, yellow frames are not queued (they are dropped).
Drop
2.4.4.4.3 - Control of flows rate (policing)
The High Priority, Normal Priority, Low Priority queues are of type WRR (Weighted Round Robin).
The principle is that the emptying of these queues is done in turn, considering each queue weight. The
weight defines the bandwidth ratio to a given queue can take on the bandwidth available to all WRR
queues.. The weights are respectively 16, 8 and 4 for the High Priority, Normal Priority and Low
Priority queues. For example if all WRR queues are fully loaded and that the available bandwidth for
all WRR queues is 100, the resulting bandwidth will be:
TC2: 100 x 16 / (16 + 8 + 4) = 57.1
TC1: 100 x 8 / (16 + 8 + 4) = 28.6
TC0: 100 x 4 / (16 + 8 + 4) = 14.3
The Very High Priority queue (TC3) is of type SP (Strict Priority). This queue is served as soon as
there is a frame in it; if no TC3 shaping is applied. Otherwise, the queue is served has soon as
possible when its shaping allows it. (See below, shaping of very high priority)
2.4.4.4.2 - Output queues (traffic classes)
When flow control is not activated, and congestion occurs, some frames must be dropped. To control
how frames will be dropped, two mechanisms exist.
First the frames are queued in different traffic classes. Each traffic class can be independently
overflowed or not. The higher the priority of the queue is the fewer frames are dropped.
Another mechanism can be used, to control, stream by stream, on which stream the frames should be
dropped. This is the policing function (coupled with metering). It is used mainly to avoid loosing frame
from all streams when one stream is exceeding its normal bandwidth.
2.4.4.4.1 - Principe
2.4.4.4 - Drop of frames
Page 2-6
Probes can also be defined on each classification flow, to count frame under and above the CIR limit
(green and yellow frames).
The Switch can read the statistics counters for the data passing through each port; they are classified as
transmission/reception and with/without errors and can be reset for all ports at the same time.
2.6 - COUNTERS
The Switch can drop frames according to their source or destination MAC address (black list, maximum
16 addresses per port).
The MAC addresses are independently defined for each GE.
2.5 - MAC FILTERING
If the metering is not used (disabled), the output rate of the Very High Priority queue can be limited
with a dedicated shaping, called TC3 shaping (or SPTC shaping). The SPTC shaping can be defined
globally for the whole IDU to disable, or as a percentage of each port bandwidth. It can also be
configured on a per port basis to disable, or to a percentage of port bandwidth, or to a manually set
value.
In ACM mode, for the radio port, the port bandwidth taken into account for SPTC percentage is the
highest profile bandwidth.
2.4.4.4.5 - Shaping of "Very High Priority" traffic class
In the Pilot interface, to allow more flexible configurations, there is no control performed on the CIR
defined for each flows. The CIR is defined for ingress flows, but the total CIR limit is applied on egress
side. This makes the total CIR available dependent on the destination port, which is a dynamic
decision taken inside the switch in EPLAN/EVPLAN modes and depends on the services
configuration. It's the user responsibility to ensure that no oversubscription is made for CIR
reservation.
IDU installation,
Antenna installation,
ODU installation,
IDU to ODU coaxial cable installation,
Connecting IDU to external equipment,
Possible installation of an E1 ports extension MUX64 SPDH shelf (optional),
Powering up the system.
Page 3-1
Whenever possible, save packages and shipping material, in case the equipment has to be returned.
The MUX64 SPDH box contains the MUX64 SPDH chassis, a power supply cable and the cable needed
to link it to the IDU.
The ODU box contains the ODU only.
The Modem(s) box contains one or two Modems unit(s) according to the customer configuration 1+0 or
1+1 or 2+0. Modem(s) can either be XPIC-capable or not, according to the customer order.
The FAN box contains the FAN unit only.
The IDU box contains the IDU equipped or not with a TNM4 card according to the customer configuration,
a power supply cable and a CD-ROM including the user manual, performances data, cable drawings and
the PilotLauncher software.
The IDU, the Modem(s) card(s), the FAN card, the ODU and the MUX64 SPDH shelf are packaged in
separate boxes.
If any part of the equipment is damaged, contact Sagemcom for repair or replacement instructions.
Verify that the items received are compliant with the packing list.
3.2 - UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT
Unpacking the Equipment,
The main topics covered are:
This paragraph explains how to install and set up SLF-H radio links.
3.1 - INTRODUCTION
3. INSTALLATION
2BINSTALLATION
Figure 3.1 - IDU installation

An additional grounding is possible by the use of a Faston plug (left side of the IDU). Use a 6 mm2
section yellow/green cable (minimum length required).
Faston socket
Attach the IDU in the 19 inch rack using M6 stainless steel screws of 12 mm. This attachment
grounds the IDU to the earth.
Page 3-2
x 6 GHz (6L) o 5.9 - 6.4 GHz

x 6 GHz (6H)o 6.4 - 7.1 GHz
x 7 GHz o 7.1 - 7.7 GHz
x 8 GHz o 7.7 - 8.5 GHz
x 11 GHz o 10.7 - 11.7 GHz
x 13 GHz o 12.75 - 13.25 GHz
x 15 GHz o 14.4 - 15.35 GHz
x 18 GHz o 17.7 - 19.7 GHz
x 23 GHz o 21.2 - 23.6 GHz
x 26 GHz o 24.5 - 26.5 GHz
x 32 GHz o 31.8 - 33.4 GHz
x 38 GHz o 37 - 39.5 GHz
Antennas models depend on the frequency bands:
External dual polarized antenna (frequency diversity or XPIC configurations) connected by flex
guides to two ODUs.
External antenna with standard rectangular waveguide interface, which is connected to the
SLF-H ODU with a flex guide.
x
x
Integrated antenna with SLF-H mechanical interface (0.3 m, 0.6 m, 0.9 m, 1.2 m or 1.8 m
diameter). The ODU is directly attached on the antenna using latches. In 1+1 configuration, a
coupler can be attached directly to the integrated antenna, the ODUs being attached in the same
way on the coupler.
Three types of antenna are available for SLF-H radios:
3.4 - ANTENNA INSTALLATION
Note: when more than one IDU are to be mounted in the rack, it is recommended to keep a gap of 1
unit between two IDUs.
To install the IDU in a 19-inch rack:
3.3 - IDU INSTALLATION
2BINSTALLATION
use pressurization windows and seals to protect waveguide connections.
with a waveguide;
Refer to the antenna manufacturer's instructions.
3.4.2 - Antenna Installation
- Antenna mount secured directly to a tower tube (diameter 88.9 or 114 mm).
- Wall-mounted staff (attached using dowels or back-plates with threaded rods).
Page 3-3
- Mounting pole secured to a concrete base plate with threaded rods embedded in the base.
- Mounting pole secured to the HEA section with back-plates or clips each side of the HRA
section.
The antenna mount may be secured in different ways depending on the antenna installation site
type and environment:
- Misalignment under extreme weather conditions must not exceed r 20 min angle in elevation
and azimuth.
Note: if there is an existing lightning rod, make sure that the ODU installation site is covered
by the lightning protection cone.
- Install a lightning rod (Franklin) and earthing.
- Make sure that nothing obstructs the link between the two antennas, even partially.
- Allow enough clearance (r10) about the alignment axis. Leave also adequate space around
the ODU to allow easy mounting/dismantling.
The following precautions must always be taken:
If the antenna is installed on towers using another type of structure (e.g., square-section tower),
special mounting kits must be used for this support.
In most cases, the antenna mounts consist of tubular poles (diameter 88.9 to 114 mm).
3.4.1 - Antenna mount
y installation and connection of a pressurizing system if the antenna is connected to the ODU
with some antennas, a pressurizing system is required. It is essential to observe the

manufacturer's recommendations:
minimum gain to achieve adequate link margin,

radiation Pattern Envelope compliant to the network and country regulations,
mechanical characteristics to meet specific site requirements (wind and frost resistance).
Note:
x
x
x
Alternative antennas to those specified by Sagemcom may be used, but they must meet the following
requirements:
2BINSTALLATION
Page 3-4
Horizontal polarization
Figure 3.3 - Polarization setting in 1+0 configuration
Vertical polarization
For antennas with a circular waveguide interface (7 GHz, 8 GHz, 32 GHz or 38 GHz), polarization
setting depends only on the ODU position. For vertical polarization, make sure that the arrow on
the ODU cover is vertical, for horizontal polarization, turn the ODU 90 degrees.
Setting the polarization:
Figure 3.2 - ODU SLF-H with integrated antenna
The ODU is directly attached to the antenna with 4 latches. It is connected to the IDU by a single
coaxial cable terminated with N connectors.
3.5.1 - 1+0 Configuration with integrated antenna
Depending on the configuration and on the antenna type, there are several ODU mounting
possibilities:
3.5 - ODU INSTALLATION
2BINSTALLATION
Page 3-5
The IDU has two Modems connected to ODUs operating at the same frequency. The standby
transmitter is configured automatically by the software in "Mute" position.
Whatever the polarization, the coupler is always mounted in the same position (the ODUs must
be vertical).
Each ODU is connected to its Modem by a coaxial cable.

As in most cases the coupler is not symmetrical, it is important to identify which ODU is
connected to the main position, and which ODU is connected to protection (standby) position.
The main and standby ODU positions are indicated on the coupler.
In this configuration, the coupler is attached on the integrated antenna with four latches. Two
ODUs are mounted each side of the coupler with four latches. Depending on the type of coupler,
the ODUs are mounted differently. Refer to the instructions marked on the coupler.
3.5.3 - "Hot standby" 1+1 configuration with coupler and integrated antenna
Figure 3.4 - ODU SLF-H mounted on pole
In this case, polarization depends on the antenna source position (vertical polarization is obtained
when the large side of the antenna waveguide is horizontal).
For standard antennas (i.e. large diameter), the ODU is mounted on a pole with a specific
mounting kit and connected to the antenna with a standard rectangular flex guide.
3.5.2 - 1+0 Configuration with pole mount and standard antenna
If the integrated antenna has a rectangular waveguide interface (6 GHz, 11 GHz, 13 GHz,
15 GHz, 18 GHz, 23 GHz or 26 GHz), then the choice of polarization depends on the antenna
source position. Note that in this case, the large side of the waveguides, antenna side, and the
ODU must coincide.
For vertical polarization, the large side of the waveguide must be in horizontal position. ODU side,
the arrow at the back of the box must be in vertical position.
For horizontal polarization, the large side of the waveguide must be in vertical position and the
arrow on the ODU must be in horizontal position.
2BINSTALLATION
Horizontal polarization
Page 3-6
It is also necessary to identify ODU cables (Main or Standby) with labels.
The coupler is attached on the remote mount and connected to the standard antenna by a
rectangular flex waveguide.
The two ODUs are mounted vertically each side of the coupler, in compliance with the
instructions shown on the coupler. Each ODU is connected to its Modem with a coaxial cable.
Polarization setting is done antenna side.
3.5.4 - 1+1 hot standby configuration with remote mounted coupler and standard
antenna
Figure 3.6 - Polarization setting on 1+1 coupler
Vertical polarization
Figure 3.5 - SLF-H 1+1 configuration with coupler and integrated antenna
2BINSTALLATION
Page 3-7
The IDU has two Modems connected to ODUs operating at the same frequency. The two
transmitters transmit permanently.
In this configuration, each ODU is remote mounted on a pole and connected to an antenna
access with a flex guide. It is important to identify the cables of the ODU mounted in vertical
polarization (channel 1) and that mounted in horizontal polarization (channel 2).
2+0 XPIC configuration with remote mounts and dual polarized antenna
3.5.10 -
The IDU has two Modems connected to ODUs operating at the two different frequencies. The two
This configuration is possible with integrated or standard antennas.
In this configuration, each ODU is connected to its own antenna.
3.5.9 - 2+0 frequency diversity configuration with 2 antennas
Page 3-8
The number of grounding points required mainly depends on the cable length.
Good protection is achieved with:
x A grounding kit on the cable as close as possible to the ODU
x A grounding kit on the cable at the building entrance
x A grounding kit on the cable at the bottom of the pylon
x A grounding kit every 50 meters
Good lightning protection is provided by grounding the antenna cable at several points. A cable
grounding kit is available on option.
Cable Grounding
polarization (channel 1) and that mounted in horizontal polarization (channel 2).
3.5.8 - 2+0 frequency diversity configuration with remote mounts and dual
polarized antenna
Disconnect the cable IDU side and short circuit the connector main ODU side (the standby ODU
connector being in open circuit). Measure the resistance of the two cables IDU side using a
multimeter. The cable to be connected on the main ODU is that with the lower resistance (now
identify the cables ODU and IDU side with a label, sticker, etc.).
Before reconnecting the IDU cables, disconnect the short circuit ODU side. Clean the connectors
if necessary and connect the cables on each ODU.
In 1+1 configuration, it is important to distinguish between the cable connected to the main ODU
and that connected to the standby ODU. If the cables are not labelled, it is necessary to perform a
resistance check to identify each cable.
Note: cables must be installed in compliance with the national and local regulations of the
installation site.
Special precautions are necessary when installing cables to prevent possible damage by
lightning (regular grounding).
Self-vulcanizing tape is wound around the connectors to make them water-tight.
Since the Modem ODU access is a TNC type connector, an optional RG223/U Type stub cable
equipped with a 50 ohm angled male TNC connector at one end and a 50 ohm straight female N
connector at the other must be inserted between the cable connecting the ODU and the Modem;
this cable can be ordered from Sagemcom (see Table 3-7 - Cable References for SLF-H).
Only connectors recommended by the cable manufacturer should be used. These connectors
must be assembled in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Two types of cable are recommended: RG8/X (1/4") for lengths less than or equal to 70 m, and
RG8/U (3/8") for length less than or equal to 200 m. Andrew LDF4-50A cable can be used for
lengths up to 500 m. Other cables may be used, but must be compatible as regards outdoor use
(resistance to UV), losses, (generally, cable attenuation in its total length shouldnt go above
18dB at 350MHz), shielding (double or triple braid) and characteristics impedance (50 Ohm, N
male straight connectors at each end).
3.6 - INSTALLING THE IDU TO ODU COAXIAL CABLE
2BINSTALLATION
In this configuration, each ODU is connected to its own antenna.
3.5.7 - 1+1 frequency diversity configuration with 2 antennas
polarization (main) and that mounted in horizontal polarization (protection).
3.5.6 - 1+1 frequency diversity configuration with remote mounts and dual
polarized antenna
This configuration is similar to "hot standby" except that the ODUs are not coupled to the same
antenna: they are located at different positions, each connected to its own antenna.
3.5.5 - 1+1 space diversity configuration with 2 antennas
2BINSTALLATION
Wayside
channel
Ethernet
management ports
Giga Ethernet access
2Mbit/s optional accesses

Trib 1-8
Trib 9-16
Modem 1
Fans
Page 3-9
x Four Gigabit Ethernet ports "GbE1", "GbE2", "GbE3", "GbE4: these ports receive optical SFP
(LC/PC connector) or electrical (RJ45 connector) modules.
x 2 x 10/100BaseT ports dedicated to network management "Mgmt1" and "Mgmt2".
x 1 "Wayside" 10/100BaseT port: auxiliary channel.
x 1 "Protect" port reserved for future external IDU protection.
x Four Ethernet ports RJ 45 connectors:
x "Alarms IN/OUT" access high density 15-pin DB connector: includes the 5 external alarm inputs
and the 3 programmable relay outputs.
x "Serial" (PC) access 9-pin DB connector: serial management access for connection to a PC. This
access is used to consult or change the IP address of the Ethernet Mgmt ports and the equipment
virtual IP address.
x "POWER" access 4-pin connector: -48 V power supply input (voltage between -39 VDC and
-59 VDC),
Note: in 1+1 Hot Stand By configuration, since asymmetric couplers are used, the ODU 1 will be the
main ODU and the ODU 2 will be the standby ODU.
To ODU1
To ODU2
Figure 3.8 - Front panel of the SLF-H IDU in 1+1 configuration
On/off switch
Green Power Led
Modem 2
Figure 3.7 - Front panel of the SLF-H IDU in 1+0 configuration
Alarms
Inputs/Outputs
-48 V input
PC serial port
Interface connector for

2Mbit/s extension
All IDU accesses are located on the front panel:
3.7.1 - IDU Front panel accesses
3.7 - CONNECTING THE IDU TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
2BINSTALLATION
Pin
-48V A
GND A
GND B
-48V B
-48 V DC
Ground
Ground
-48 V DC
Meaning
Input
Output
Ground
Page 3-10
This connector allows access to:
3.7.2.3 - "Alarms in/out" access High density 15-pin DB connector
Figure 3.9 - "Serial" connector pinout
Table 3-1 - 4-pin "POWER" connector pinout
Signal name
3.7.2.2 - The connector pinout is as follows:
1
2
3
4
Power connection is via a 4-pin male connector with the following pinout.
3.7.2.1 - "POWER" access 4-pin connector
3.7.2 - Description of accesses and connectors
x One ground connection (male "Faston" connector).
x 1 or 2 "ODU" ports TNC connector: connection with the ODU.
x "Trib extension" port - 44-pin DB connector for connecting cable with an E1 extension MUX64
SPDH shelf.
x 2 Mbit/s optional ports "TRIB 1-8" and "TRIB 9-16" G703 44-pin DB connector: configurable by
software either in 75: coaxial mode or in 120: balanced mode. This configuration is carried out by
connector.
These modules can be 1000BaseSX (multimode optical), 1000BaseLX (single-mode optical) or

10/100/1000BaseT (electrical)
Each Gigabit Ethernet port is configured independently: one port can be configured with an
electrical module, another with an optical module. Note that the remote terminal ports are
configured independently from those of the local terminal.
2BINSTALLATION
EXT IN2
EXT IN3
EXT IN4
EXT IN5
11
Description
External alarm input #5
15
10
EXT IN1
Signal
Pin
10 k :
-48V
S LF-H
Figure 3.11 - External alarm electrical interface
5 e xternal inputs
GND
EXT IN
Open : alarm if config ured in in vert position (I)

Closed: No a larm if configured in invert po sition (I)
Open : no alarm if con figu red in nor ma l position (N)

Closed: alarm if confifgure d in normal position (N)
5 external alarms (inputs)
Ph otocoup ler
Page 3-11
The 3 relay contacts are available. These contacts can be assigned either to internal alarms of
the equipment, external alarms, or a combination of the two.
The alarm state corresponds to the relay in standby position (normally closed).
Figure 3.10 - Relay output electrical interface
Common
Normally Closed
Normally Open
3 configurable relay outputs: these alarms are managed by the Pilot software. The electrical
interface for each relay is given below:
The alarm connector pinout is given below.
2BINSTALLATION
RELAY 2C
RELAY 2NO
RELAY 1C
RELAY 1NO
12
13
14
15
Relay #1 Normally Open
Relay #1 Common
Relay #2 Common
Relay #3 Normally Closed
6
7
8
Name
Meaning
Not Connected
Not Connected
Transmit Ethernet - wire
Not Connected
Not Connected
Transmit Ethernet + wire
Receive Ethernet - wire
Receive Ethernet + wire
Table 3-3 - Ethernet port pinout
NC
NC
TXETHN
NC
NC
TXETHP
RXETHN
RXETHP
Page 3-12
3.7.2.5 - Gigabit Ethernet ports "GbE1" to "GbE4"
Each connector has two Leds:

- a green Led on the left: indicates Ethernet signal activity at the input. If this Led is not lit permanently,
it means that the cable is not correctly connected to the port, or that the equipment connected to the
SLF-H does not work.
- an orange Led on the right: indicates a 100BaseT transmission (10BaseT when the Led is off).
I
O
2
3
I/O
1
Pin
The 3 connectors have the same pinout (Ethernet standard):
The ports "Mgmt1" and "Mgmt2" are part of an internal hub, and can be connected to the Ethernet port
of the PC, to another IDU or to an SNMP manager.
RJ 45 connectors are used for Ethernet type signals.
3.7.2.4 - "Mgmt" and "Wayside" Ethernet ports
Table 3-2 - "Alarm IN/OUT" connector pinout
RELAY 3NC
11
Ground
GND
RELAY 1NC
9
10

RELAY 3NO
RELAY 2NC
Description
Relay #3 Common
Signal
RELAY 3C
Pin
2BINSTALLATION
SX
LX
LC/PC
500 m min
220 m min
0 dBm
-17 dBm
LC/PC
5000 m min
550 m min
550 m min
-3 dBm
-19 dBm
-11 dBm min

-11.5 dBm min
-11.5 dBm min
100 m UTP or STP Category 5 Gigabit Ethernet compatible
RJ45
Standard
Maximum cable attenuation
Connector
The pinout of the 44-pin DB connectors is given below (view of the IDU front panel).
Page 3-13
These interfaces are designed to operate in 120 Ohm balanced or 75 Ohm unbalanced. To operate in
75 Ohm, the signals corresponding to the negative polarities (- wire) are connected to the ground by the
connector of the cable.
The 16 x 2 Mbit/s ports are available on the two 44-pin DB connectors.
3.7.2.6 - G703 2 Mbit/s ports - 44-pin DB connectors
A "GbE Lnk/Act" Led corresponds to each port:

Led off: link down
Green Led lit permanently: link up
Green Led flashing: traffic indicator, flashes for each GE frame
Orange Led lit: collision
10, 100, or 1000 Mbit/s
IEEE 802.3
Speed
- SFP electrical modules with the following characteristics:
Table 3-4 - Characteristics of the Gigabit Ethernet optical interface
Connector
Typical range
10 m fibre
50 m fibre
62.5 m fibre
Max. permitted
power
Sensitivity at 10
-10
-9.5 dBm min

-9.5 dBm min
Speed
Transmitted power
10 m fibre
50 m fibre
62.5 m fibre
1250 Mbit/s
100 ppm
1250 Mbit/s
100 ppm
IEEE 802.3z
1270 1355 nm
IEEE 802.3z
770 - 860 nm
Wavelength
Single-mode
Standard
Multimode
Interface
Interfaces
- SFP optical modules (Small Form Factor Pluggable Transceiver MultiSource Agreement 14 Sept
2000).
These ports can receive:
The IDU has four Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the front panel.
2BINSTALLATION
Page 3-14
15
14
13
12
11
10
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Pin N
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
15
2BINSTALLATION
Name
GND
TRIB_IN_01N
TRIB_IN_01P
TRIB_OUT_01N
TRIB_OUT_01P
TRIB_IN_02N
TRIB_IN_02P
TRIB_OUT_02N
TRIB_OUT_02P
TRIB_IN_03N
TRIB_IN_03P
TRIB_OUT_03N
TRIB_OUT_03P
TRIB_IN_04N
TRIB_IN_04P
TRIB_OUT_04N
TRIB_OUT_04P
TRIB_IN_05N
TRIB_IN_05P
TRIB_OUT_05N
TRIB_OUT_05P
TRIB_IN_06N
TRIB_IN_06P
TRIB_OUT_06N
TRIB_OUT_06P
TRIB_IN_07N
TRIB_IN_07P
TRIB_OUT_07N
TRIB_OUT_07P
TRIB_IN_08N
TRIB_IN_08P
TRIB_OUT_08N
TRIB_OUT_08P
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Meaning
31
16
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Tributary input No. 1 negative polarity
Tributary input No. 1 positive polarity
Tributary output No. 1 negative polarity
Tributary output No. 1 positive polarity
Table 3-5 - TRIB 1-8 connector pinout
Channel
44
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Channel
Name
Meaning
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Table 3-6 - TRIB 9-16 connector pinout
GND
TRIB_IN_09N
TRIB_IN_09P
TRIB_OUT_09N
TRIB_OUT_09P
TRIB_IN_10N
TRIB_IN_10P
TRIB_OUT_10N
TRIB_OUT_10P
TRIB_IN_11N
TRIB_IN_11P
TRIB_OUT_11N
TRIB_OUT_11P
TRIB_IN_12N
TRIB_IN_12P
TRIB_OUT_12N
TRIB_OUT_12P
TRIB_IN_13N
TRIB_IN_13P
TRIB_OUT_13N
TRIB_OUT_13P
TRIB_IN_14N
TRIB_IN_14P
TRIB_OUT_14N
TRIB_OUT_14P
TRIB_IN_15N
TRIB_IN_15P
TRIB_OUT_15N
TRIB_OUT_15P
TRIB_IN_16N
TRIB_IN_16P
TRIB_OUT_16N
TRIB_OUT_16P
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
15
14
13
12
11
10
16
Pin N
Page 3-15
2BINSTALLATION
To auxiliary Ethernet
Figure 3.12 - Cables for a terminal station
Straight or crossed RJ45

Ethernet cables (3 or 4)
To customer
Ethernet
To management network or
other equipment
management access
Optical fiber (8 to 11)

or Ethernet cable (5)
IDU ODU cable (7)
To ODU
To distribution
panel
Page 3-16
18
Figure 3.13 - Cables for a relay station
Ethernet crossed or straight cables
Optical fiber or Giga Ethernet cable
2 Mbit/s channel transfer
A relay station consists of two terminals connected "back to back". Typical wiring of this configuration is given
below:
To distribution
panel
To -48 V
power supply
Vers PC
2 Mbit/s cable
(Balanced or unbalanced)
(12 to 17)
The cables which may be connected to the IDU front panel are listed below:
3.7.3 - Cable references for SLF-H
2BINSTALLATION
3000281884
251559356EA
251454275EA
251615886EA
252064893EA
3000279375
3000279376
3000279377
3000301874
3000301875
3000301877
3000279382
3000325442
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Table 3-7 - Cable References for SLF-H
- Crossed 2 Mbit/s transfer cable

- Cable DB44HD MUX64
- 2 Mbit/s tributary 75 : In/Out cable

DB44 LIBRE-5M

DB44-1,6/5,6 6M-5M

DB44-1,6/5,6 6F-5M

DB44HD BNC-M

DB44HD BNC-F
- Half 2 Mbit/s tributary120 : In/Out cable

DB44HD
- Multimode optical jumper

LC-PC/SC-PC
- Multimode optical jumper

LC-PC/LC-PC
- Singe-mode optical jumper

LC-PC/SC-PC
- Singe-mode optical jumper

LC-PC/LC-PC
- IDU-ODU cable TNC angled male/N straight female
- Alarm cable to distribution panel

(DB15HD)
3000279379
- 9-pin sub-D serial cable (PC)
- GIGA ETHERNET straight cable

(for electrical SFP module)
3000364085
- Power cable with redundancy
3000319349
Designation
- Power cable (1 power supply)
- Crossed ETHERNET cable

(NMI/NMI transfer or management)
- ETHERNET straight cable
(NMI/NMI transfer or management)
3000335369
Drawing No
Figure N
Length
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
1.5 m
3m
1.5 m
3m
1.5 m
3m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
1m
2.5 m
5m
10 m
20 m
2.5 m
5m
10 m
20 m
2.5 m
5m
10 m
20 m
2.5 m
5m
10 m
20 m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
2.5 m
0.30 m
Page 3-17
252867400
252577720
252867413
252577738
252890368
251559377
251559504
251559517
251559567
251454262
251454283
251454296
251454410
251616049
251616060
251616078
251616099
252064934
252064947
252064955
252064989
252867083
252867096
252867306
252867314
252867327
252867335
252867348
252867356
252867369
252867377
252867380
252867398
253051829
253021238
253021832
253051840
253051853
253021241
253021861
253051874
253051882
253021262
253021902
253051915
252867877
253179789
Off-the-shelf
cable
Sagem code
253245103
253245124
253245132
253245145
253132640
253132658
253132806
253132819
55670223
55670224
55671323
55671324
55671321
55671322
2BINSTALLATION
253 108 834
GE Electrical SFP Module

(10/100/1000BaseT)
TRIB 17-32
2Mbit/s optional accesses

TRIB 33-48
TRIB 49-64
Figure 3.14 - Front panel of MUX64 SPDH Unit
Interface connector for

2Mbit/s extension
Green Power Led
TRIB 65-80
Page 3-18
The MUX64 SPDH shelf has its own secured -48V power input.
The same power supply must be used for both the IDU and the SPDH MUX64.
The MUX64 SPDH unit will be connected to the IDU by a cable that interconnects the 2 Mbit/s extension
connector of each equipment.
2
An additional grounding is possible by the use of a Faston plug (left side of the shelf). Use a 6 mm section
yellow/green cable (minimum length required).
Attach the MUX64 SPDH shelf in the rack using M6 stainless steel screws of 12 mm. This attachment grounds
the shelf to the earth.
This 0.75U-height unit will be installed above the IDU. It's mandatory to have 1U margin between the IDU-H
and the SPDH
A MUX64 SPDH shelf, allowing an extension up to 64 E1 2 Mbit/s ports can be installed in same rack as the
IDU. This shelf will increase the total number of physical E1 ports to 80.
Secured
-48 V input
Faston socket
3.8 - MUX64 SPDH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
Table 3-8 - SFP module references for SLF-H
253 108 813

253 108 826
SFP Module GE LX
Sagemcom P/N
SFP Module GE SX
Designation
3.7.4 - Module references for SLF-H
2BINSTALLATION
60
40
59
78
21
39
20
The pinout of the 78-pin DB connectors is given below (view of the front panel).
Page 3-19
These interfaces are designed to operate in 120 Ohm balanced or 75 Ohm unbalanced. To operate in
75 Ohm, the signals corresponding to the negative polarities (- wire) are connected to the ground by the
connector of the cable.
The 64 x 2 Mbit/s ports are distributed on four 78-pin DB connectors.
3.8.2.2 - G703 2 Mbit/s ports - 78-pin DB connectors
This access is identical to the "POWER" access of the IDU (refer to 3.7.2.1 -)
3.8.2.1 - "POWER" access 4-pin connector
3.8.2 - Description of accesses and connectors
x One ground connection (male "Faston" connector).
x 2Mbit/s optional ports "TRIB 17-32", "TRIB 33-48", "TRIB 49-64" and "TRIB 65-80" G703
78 pin DB connector: configurable by software either in 75: coaxial mode or in 120: balanced
mode. This configuration is carried out by connector.
x "Trib extension" port - 44-pin DB connector for connecting cable with the IDU.
x "POWER" access 4-pin connector: secured -48 V power supply input (voltage between -39 VDC
and -59 VDC),
3.8.1 - Front panel accesses of MUX 64 SPDH shelf
2BINSTALLATION
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
Page 3-20
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Pin N
2BINSTALLATION
Channel
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
Meaning
Ground
Name
GND
E1_ET1N_Gx
E1_ET1P_Gx
E1_ST1N_Gx
E1_ST1P_Gx
E1_ET2N_Gx
E1_ET2P_Gx
E1_ST2N_Gx
E1_ST2P_Gx
E1_ET3N_Gx
E1_ET3P_Gx
E1_ST3N_Gx
E1_ST3P_Gx
E1_ET4N_Gx
E1_ET4P_Gx
E1_ST4N_Gx
E1_ST4P_Gx
E1_ET5N_Gx
E1_ET5P_Gx
E1_ST5N_Gx
E1_ST5P_Gx
E1_ET6N_Gx
E1_ET6P_Gx
E1_ST6N_Gx
E1_ST6P_Gx
E1_ET7N_Gx
E1_ET7P_Gx
E1_ST7N_Gx
E1_ST7P_Gx
E1_ET8N_Gx
E1_ET8P_Gx
E1_ST8N_Gx
E1_ST8P_Gx
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
Not cabled
GND
E1_ET9N_Gx
E1_ET9P_Gx
E1_ST9N_Gx
E1_ST9P_Gx
E1_ET10N_Gx
E1_ET10P_Gx
E1_ST10N_Gx
E1_ST10P_Gx
E1_ET11N_Gx
E1_ET11P_Gx
E1_ST11N_Gx
E1_ST11P_Gx
E1_ET12N_Gx
E1_ET12P_Gx
E1_ST12N_Gx
E1_ST12P_Gx
E1_ET13N_Gx
E1_ET13P_Gx
E1_ST13N_Gx
E1_ST13P_Gx
E1_ET14N_Gx
E1_ET14P_Gx
E1_ST14N_Gx
E1_ST14P_Gx
E1_ET15N_Gx
E1_ET15P_Gx
E1_ST15N_Gx
E1_ST15P_Gx
E1_ET16N_Gx
E1_ET16P_Gx
E1_ST16N_Gx
E1_ST16P_Gx
Name
Ground
Meaning
Table 3-9 - TRIB16E1 connector pinout for the MUX64 SPDH unit
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
Channel
Page 3-21
An under-equipped version of the SPDH unit exists.

It provides up to 32 E1 2 Mbps/s interfaces, located on the TRIB 17-32 and TRIB 33-48 connectors.
TRIB 49-64 and TRIB 65-80 connectors are not available.
3.8.3 - MUX32 SPDH version
G1: TRIBs 17 to 32
G2: TRIBs 33 to 48
G3: TRIBs 49 to 64
G4: TRIBs 65 to 80
Note: "Gx" represents one of the four connectors of the MUX64 SPDH shelf, the pinout being identical for
each one.
59
58
57
56
45
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
Pin N
2BINSTALLATION
Page 3-22
3000325442
3000319355
3000319354
3000319353
3000319352
3000319351
3000319350
3000319349
3000335369
Drawing N
253133184
253133262
0.30m
253133353
253179789
253133366
Table 3-10 - Cable References for MUX64 SPDH unit
- CORD DB44HD MUX64
12m
25m
DB78HD LIBRE
253133345
253133332
5m
2.5m
253133291
253133311
25m
12m
253133283
2.5m
5m
253133217
253133259
12m
25m
253133209
2.5m
5m
253133176
253133163
253133155
253133142
253133134
253133121
253133113
253133100
25 m
12 m
5m
2.5 m
- CORD2Mb TRIB 75 IN/OUT
DB78HD-1,6/5,6M
DB78HD-1,6/5,6F
DB78HD BNC-M
- 2 Mbit/s tributary 75 In/Out cable
12 m
DB78HD BNC-F
25 m
5m
2.5 m
253133072
253133093
12 m
253133069
253133048
253132819
253132806
253132658
253245103
253245124
253245132
253245145
253132640
Sagemcom code
25 m
5m
2.5 m
25 m
12 m
5m
2.5 m
5m
12 m
25 m
2.5 m
Length
- 2 Mbit/s tributary 75 In/Out cable
DB78HD (1/2 cord)
-2 Mbit/s tributary 120 In/Out cable
- DC Power cable with redundancy
- Power cable (1 power supply)
Designation
3.8.4 - Cable References for MUX64 SPDH shelf
2BINSTALLATION
Modem 1
check in the same way the power supply connector connected to the MUX64 SPDH shelf
(polarities given in Table 3-1).
make sure that these two power cable come from the same power supply
Fans
the power supply voltage is within the range: -39 V to -59 V (-48 V nominal). Measure the
voltage (polarity and amplitude) on the cable plug before plugging it in the IDU. Only
negative DC voltage must be used.
To ODU1
To ODU2
Figure 3.15 - SLF-H 1+1 IDU
On/Off switch
Green Power Led
Modem 2
the equipment has not been damaged during installation

the equipment has been assembled correctly
in 1+1 each Modem is connected to the corresponding ODU
the antenna polarization is correct
the IDUs, ODUs, MUX64 SPDH and connecting cables have been grounded
plug the power supply cable to the IDU,
the green PWR Led on the front panel of the MUX64 SPDH shelf should be lit,
if the terminal is a 1+0 system, switch on the terminal by setting the switch on the Modem
to ON. If the terminal is a 1+1 system, set the switch on the second Modem to ON as
well,
the green Power Led(s) on the front panel(s) of the Modem(s) should be lit,
measure voltage at the input of each terminal and record the values on the
Commissioning Form at the end of paragraph 4,
measure voltage at the input of the MUX64 SPDH shelf and record the values on the
Commissioning Form at the end of paragraph 4.
Page 3-23
plug the power supply cable to the MUX64 SPDH shelf,
connect the Trib extension connectors of IDU and MUX64 SPDH shelf using the
specific cable,
On the assumption of a MUX64 SPDH shelf, carry out in the order the following operations:
DC Power ln
x
x
x
x
x
Before powering up the terminal, check that:
3.9 - POWERING UP THE SYSTEM
2BINSTALLATION
Serial port (or USB port + external USB/series adapter)
Note: by default, the password is empty on first commissioning.
Page 4-1
Validate the settings and save the connection (Save command in the application File menu). The next
time you run Hyperterminal, simply choose the connection icon to connect to the equipment.
In the next window, set the following parameters:

x Bits per second: 19200
x Data bits: 8
x Parity: none
x Stop bits: 1
x Flow control: none
In the next window choose the PC "COM" port which is connected to the equipment then validate.
Enter a name in the window which is displayed (e.g. SLF-H), choose an icon for the connection then
validate.
Run Windows HyperTerminal: "Start/Programs/Accessories/Communications/HyperTerminal".
Connect the IDU serial port to a serial port on the PC with an RS-232 cable.
4.2 - CONFIGURING EQUIPMENT IP ADDRESSES
Pilot software
10/100BaseT Ethernet port
CD-ROM drive
SVGA screen, minimum resolution 600 x 800 (minimum 16 colours)
300 Mbytes available on hard disk
Windows hyperterminal
RAM: 256 Mbytes (2 Gbytes for Vista)
Pentium 4 or equivalent, frequency: 1 GHz minimum
OS: Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7
The minimum configuration proposed for the operating PC is as follows:
Configuration required
The equipment is commissioned and operated from a PC equipped with VT100 emulation and the
Pilot Software.
This paragraph describes a preliminary configuration of a SLF-H, its commissioning and how to verify
correct operation after installation.
4.1 - INTRODUCTION
4. COMMISSIONING CONFIGURATION AND TESTS
3BCOMMISSIONING CONFIGURATION AND TESTS
Choice 1: Configuration of the equipment IP address
The default IP address is 192.168.001.002.

Enter the required IP address, keeping in mind that it must be different from that of the other
equipment addresses and must be defined in a subnet different from that of the Ethernet interface.
The IP address of the remote equipment will belong to the same network.
Example: if the IP address of the local equipment is 192.168.113.141 the remote equipment IP
address should be 192.168.113.xxx with xxx not equal to 141.
Page 4-2
To select a command, type the command number in the text zone Choice? and press ENTER to
validate.
Validate, the following window appears:
Choice 3: Ethernet interface configuration
"Interface State": use of the interface: 0 (Interface off) or 1 (Interface on).

"IP Address"
"Subnet mask"
"Route Protocol": 0 (None), 1 (RIP) or 2 (OSPF)
Page 4-3
The default Gateway IP address is 000.000.000.000.

You are prompted to reboot the equipment. You can reboot later, without affecting the traffic, after
entering the settings.
Choice 2: Default gateway configuration
The Ethernet interface characteristics are displayed and can be modified:
Error message "Equipment address is mandatory": you must enter the equipment address
You are prompted to reboot the equipment. You can reboot later, without affecting the traffic, after
entering the settings.
management equipment address: 135.010.115.015 with a subnet mask of

255.255.255.0
The PC address must be 135.010.115.xxx with xxx not equal to 0, 255 or 015.
The address of the remote equipment must belong to another network, e.g.
10.142.113.150.
Choice 6: Ping
Page 4-4
Note: the Ping command is used to check the accessibility and return path from the remote equipment,
testing both the interface address and the equipment address. If the address of the port sending
the Ping command is different from the equipment address, two commands are transmitted.
"IP Address": choice of IP address of the equipment you want to reach.

Return delay in ms.
Choice 5: Logout
Setting finished, this command closes the current session.
The session is closed automatically after several minutes with no activity (delay configurable from the
manager).
Choice 4: REBOOT the equipment

This command reboots the application immediately, restarting with the settings already stored in the
equipment.
Reboot takes place without affecting the traffic.
You are prompted to reboot the equipment. You may reboot later, without affecting the traffic, after entering
the settings.
These management Ethernet interfaces are available on the equipment accesses "Mgmt1" and
"Mgmt2".
Example:
The IP address of the Ethernet interface for the equipment connected to the
management PC must belong to the same network and have the same subnet mask as
the PC IP address.
The IP address of the Ethernet interface for the remote equipment must belong to a
different network.
Choice 7: Trace route
Choice 8: Factory settings
Unit. size: maximum size of the IP packet that can reach the remote equipment.
Page 4-5
This menu allows to configure the default mode for ODUs mute (mute On or Off when a new ODU is
connected).
Choice 9: Default configuration of ODUs mute
The principle of equipment IP addressing is described in 6.6.1 -. Depending on the software release,
the routing tables may be static (R1.1) or dynamic (R1.2 and higher). In this case, the RIP and OSPF
protocols can be implemented in order to simplify network management configuration.
the IP address of the remote equipment is in the same network as that of the local equipment (not
mandatory but recommended),
the IP address of the Ethernet interface for the remote equipment does not belong to the same
network as that of the local equipment.
These settings will also be applied on the remote equipment, making sure that:
Note: this command is only available from release R1.2.
This command is used to restore the default factory settings.
Delay (ms): return time.
IP address: IP address of the recipient (equipment or subnet).
The screen displays the management routes already defined with their characteristics:
Hops: 1, 2, 3 Path to move from one machine to another.
"IP Address": choice of IP address of the equipment you want to reach.
Page 4-6
The following window appears:
Unavailable Equipment
Available and recognized

Equipment
IP Equipment address
Once the software is installed, double click on the Pilot icon
Insert the Pilot Launcher software CD-ROM into the drive. The installation software runs automatically
if the drive has been configured in "Autorun" mode.
Otherwise, run Windows explorer and double click on "setup.exe".
Note that it is not necessary to separately install the Pilot Software if pilot launcher is installed (chapter
4.3.2 -)
The Pilot Launcher allows to automatically run a version of the Pilot software compatible with the
software version of the IDU selected by its IP address.
It also allows you to view the record of the equipment (in French or English) according to the IDU
selected.
4.3.1 - Installing the software Pilot Launcher
4.3 - PILOT SOFTWARE AND IP CONNECTIVITY
Set and change parameters on local and remote terminals
Monitor RSL, BER and alarms
Download and activate a new software version
Perform installation and maintenance operations
Configure the network management interface
Page 4-7
The Pilot software is specific to this version of SLF-H and is not compatible with the
previous versions.
The following window appears:
Once the software is installed, double click on the Pilot icon
Insert the Pilot software CD-ROM into the drive. The installation software runs automatically if the
drive has been configured in "Autorun" mode.
Otherwise, run Windows explorer and double click on "setup.exe".
View local and remote terminal configurations
The Pilot allows the user to:
4.3.2 - Installing the Pilot software
Page 4-8
Declare the route to reach the local IDU equipment IP address, then check the connectivity by pinging
this address.
Check that the IP address of the management PC belongs to the same network as that of the local
IDU Ethernet interface, then check the connectivity with a ping of the IDU Ethernet address from the
Windows DOS command prompt.
Before starting a Pilot session, check the connectivity between the PC and the local IDU.
Connect an RJ45 Ethernet cable between access "Mgmt1" or "Mgmt2" of the local IDU and the
management network.
4.3.3 - IP connectivity
The button "English" allows to edit the user

manual in English in pdf format
The button "French" allows to edit the user

manual in French in pdf format
The button "Add SLF Host" Allows to

add an IP address in the list of
equipment
Double click on the address of the

IDU to start the session of the Pilot,
the Pilot's main screen appears in
default mode "View only".
Page 4-9
The button "Measurements" allows to edit the

Measurement tables (Ethernet throughput and
latency, RSL thresholds, transmit power)
4.3.4 - Launch Auto Pilot with the Pilot Launcher:
Page 4-10
Double click on the IDU address to start the Pilot session; by default, the main Pilot screen is displayed in
"View Only" mode.
Click on OK
Click on Add to enter the local IDU address.
After checking the connectivity, start a Pilot session from the Session/Open session menu.
The local IDU address is entered in the following window.
4.3.5 - Starting a Pilot session
View Only: read only mode
modulation type, radio channel and capacity (E1 number),
link ID code,
transmit power; the Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) function must be inhibited at this
stage ("OFF" position on the Pilot screen).
Page 4-11
When the link is not established, the Pilot screen indicates "NO REMOTE RADIO" or "No open
session" on the right side of the screen (see after).
The transmitter should be kept in mute position until the transmit frequency, modulation and capacity
are properly configured.
Note: when powering up for the first time (factory output setting), the transmitter is in "MUTE" position,
in order to avoid transmitting signals at a frequency which could disturb neighbouring links.
channel transmit frequency,
The parameters of the local and remote terminals must be compatible.

In order of priority, the first essential parameters to configure before establishing the link are for each
IDU are:
The preliminary configuration of each IDU must be carried out separately at each end of the link. Once
the link is established, virtually all the parameters can be checked from the local terminal.
4.4.1 - Setting the parameters of each IDU
4.4 - LINK PRELIMINARY CONFIGURATION
Click on the "Login" button to enter the default password: "2345" for a "Super User" level.
Click here to login
Page 4-12
The following screen is displayed:

(the displayed bandwidth is the Ethernet bandwidth level 2).
Click on the top bar
Modulation, radio channel and capacity parameters
Move the cursor along the Tx Freq rule or click on the left or right button, then validate by
clicking on "Confirm" in the top toolbar.
Use the arrows to change the frequency in steps of 250 kHz.
Channel transmit frequency
With the transmitter still in "Mute" and the ATPC "OFF", configure the following parameters:
If you are logged on as a "Super User", you can change the terminal configuration with the buttons.
Each button provides access to a specific parameter. Note that only one change at a time is allowed.
The equipment Leds and the 3 programmable relays status are also displayed on the Pilot. In addition,
the "Shelf view" button is used to display the front panel of the equipment managed.
The Channel 1 part indicates the received signal level and the reception BER; it is used to configure
the transmit frequency and transmit power values, ATPC activation and Mute function. In ACM
modulation, the current modulation will be indicated, those of the top bar being the max modulation of
operation and the modulation from which there is no more GigaEthernet transmission.
The IDU part of the screen is used to define the site name, configuration type, link ID code and to
display generic alarms, bit error rate (BER) and packet error rate (PER) for a given counting period
(1 min, 15 min or 24 h).
The radio channel, modulation, capacity, Ethernet bandwidth are displayed at the top of the screen.
The confirm/cancel modification request is also displayed in this bar: "Confirm" or "Cancel".
This screen will display the local terminal parameters on the left of the screen and the remote terminal
parameters on the right when the link is established.
In this example, the equipment is neither receiving signal (RSL < -90) nor transmitting (mute ON).
IDU Equipment IP address
Bellow is a list of available capacities that can be configured in fixed and ACM mode:
Page 4-13
Choose the parameters according to the choices available for the link (following table) then
validate with "Apply".
Please note that when switch configuration in ACM mode, by default the maximum and
minimum profiles will be set to the lowest value (0) which is QPSK modulation.
For ACM Modulation, the buttons Maximum Profile

Ge Tx mute on profile below allows user to have a choice of up to 9 profiles:
Page 4-14
Table 4-1 - Configuration compatibility
Page 4-15
The link ID code is used to avoid demodulating data from another neighbouring link using the
Link ID
The available capacities also depend on the ODUs connected to Modem boards. Please refer to
ODU specifications in Appendix 1 at the end of this document.
The available capacities may vary according to Modem software licenses. Please refer to
chapter 6.26 -.
Table 4-2 - Configuration compatibility
* If installation of a MUX64 SPDH shelf.
Numbers indicated in the green cells correspond to the profile number.
The transmitter's "Mute" position is set to "OFF".

Adjust the transmit power value as planned in the design calculation, keeping ATPC "OFF".
, or click on the left
Move the cursor along the Tx Power rule
or right button, then validate.
Use the arrows to change the power in steps of 0.5 dB. Moving the cursor in the middle
changes the power in steps of 2.5 dB.
Page 4-16
4.4.2 - Antenna alignment
Indication that remote equipment

might be muted
Command to issue mute remove request
If by mistake, the remote equipment is muted (mute ON) but the rest of the configuration is properly
applied on both sides (frequency, modulation, radio channel, capacity), it is possible to remove the
mute on remote equipment. (See below screenshot).
The local terminal is now correctly configured. Repeat the procedure for the remote terminal in order
to establish the link.
Important: to avoid saturating the transmitter, the Pilot software automatically prevents
power values greater than the maximum allowed for the current modulation. Refer to the
values in APPENDIX 1 Transmission characteristics.
Transmit power
same frequency which could disturb the receiver. Link ID Codes of the local and remote
terminals must be the same. This code consists of a number from 1 to 255 chosen by the
customer.
-90 dBm
-70 dBm
-60 dBm
-50 dBm
-40 dBm
Figure 4.1 - SLF-H ODU RSL voltage
-80 dBm
-30 dBm
RSL
(ODU input)
-20 dBm
Good alignment
Page 4-17
During alignment, it is important to distinguish between the main lobe and the side lobes by
rotating the antenna around the maximum RSL value. Note that there is around 25 dB difference
between side lobes and main lobes (i.e. about 1.5 V on the RSL voltage).
Optimum alignment is achieved when main antenna lobe is aligned with the remote antenna.
Note: RSL is measured at ODU antenna port. For 1+1 configurations involving a coupler, the
coupler losses must be taken into account to determine the RSL at antenna access.
0.5 V
1V
2V
3V
4V
4.5 V
5V
RSL voltage
A typical curve of RSL voltage against RSL at ODU input is given below. The RSL voltage is
directly proportional to the RSL expressed in dBm.
Antenna alignment is performed with both terminals operating, in normal weather conditions. The
received signal level (RSL) can be checked using the voltage available on the ODU BNC
connector.
Page 4-18
Note: if the parameters of the two terminals are correct, and if the main Pilot screen displays "NO
REMOTE RADIO", the antennas will probably have to be realigned. Check troubleshooting
guide for other potential issues.
Figure 4.3 - Main Pilot Screen for a 1+0 configuration Fixed modulation
Receive signal levels should be similar on both ends of the link (with the same transmit power).
In 1+0 and 1+1 configuration, the typical screens are as follows:
In principle, if the parameters have been entered correctly and if the antennas have been aligned
correctly, the link should be established (no screen with "NO REMOTE RADIO" message) and
the main Pilot screen should display the remote terminal parameters.
6- Compare the RSL obtained with the expected RSL. If the difference between the two values
exceeds 5 dB, readjust antenna alignment and polarization setting and check that there are
no obstacles on the radio path.
5- When the maximum voltage has been found, tighten all the bolts. Check that the voltage has
not changed after tightening. Replace the protective cap on the BNC connector.
4- Slowly rotate the antenna in the elevation direction (vertical) and find the maximum voltage.
Record the measured voltage.
3- Slowly rotate the antenna in the azimuth direction (horizontal) and find the maximum voltage.
If the voltage is around 4.5 V, reduce the remote transmit power to avoid saturation.
2- Remove the cap on the ODU BNC connector and connect a voltmeter.
1- Check that the remote terminal transmitter is on, with the planned parameters (frequency,
power, speed, modulation). Check that the ATCP is off and that the remote terminal power is
such that the RSL does not exceed 20 dBm.
Antenna alignment is carried out on each antenna using the following procedure:
The expected RSL was determined during the link budget calculation. This level depends on the
power of the remote terminal, the frequency, the antennas gain and the hop length.
Figure 4.2 - Antenna alignment
Bad alignment
Figure 4.5 - Main Pilot Screen for a 1+1 configuration Fixed modulation
Figure 4.4 - Main Pilot Screen for a 1+0 configuration ACM modulation
Page 4-19
Page 4-20
Note any discrepancies in the Commissioning Form at the end of paragraph 4.
If there are other alarms, or if the link does not work, refer to the troubleshooting paragraph ( 7 in this
manual).
In case of "GE" or "tributary" alarm, check the access configuration and connections.
Note: there may still be some alarms at this stage.
The use rate of channel 2 in reception is

95%.
The use rate of channel 1 in reception is

5%.
The channel 1, symbol "Tx" greyed, is the

inactive channel in emission (on mute).
The channel 2, symbol "Tx" not greyed, is

the active channel in emission.
The channel 1, symbol "M" greyed, is the

slave channel.
The channel 2, symbol "M" not greyed, is

the master channel.
The screens 1+1 display the master channel, the active transmitter and the percentage of use of
master and slave Modems. Note that in 1+1 FD, both transmitters are active at the same time, and
thus not active Tx information is displayed.
Figure 4.6 - Main Pilot Screen for a 1+1 configuration ACM modulation
Install the two ODUs on a dual polarization antenna using appropriate mounting kit and mark
the ODUs with V and H respectively.
Install two cables between the ODUs and the Modems. Note that the cable length difference
should not exceed 10 meters.
Mark the cables with V and H respectively and make sure that V is connected to the right
Modem and H is connected to the left Modem. Mark the Modems respectively.
Power up V channel on both ends of the link and configure it to the desired frequency channel,
and maximum power.
Align the antennas, one at a time, until expected RSL is achieved. Make sure achieved RSL is
no more than 5dB from the expected level.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verify that the XPI (Cross Polarization Interference) is at least 25dB whereby:
9.
Bellow is a screenshot of the Pilot software main window in XPIC mode.
Page 4-21
10. If the XPI is less than 25dB, adjust the feed polarization by opening the polarization screw and
gently rotating the feed to minimize the RSLXPOL.
RSLPOL = received level with the same polarization used at both sites
RSLXPOL = received level with orthogonal polarizations used at both sites
XPI=RSLPOL - RSLXPOL
Check the RSL achieved in the H ODU and compare it to the RSL achieved by the V ODU.
8.
With :
Disconnect the V cable from the V ODU and connect it to the H ODU.
7.
Polarization adjustment should be done on one antenna only.
Polarization alignment is required in order to verify that the antenna feeds are adjusted, ensuring that the
antenna XPD (Cross Polarization Discrimination) is achieved.
Install the dual polarization antenna and point it in the direction of the other site.
1.
This section describes the installation and commissioning procedure for a system in which the XPIC feature
is installed in a Co-Channel Dual Polarization configuration.
4.4.3 - Antenna alignment in XPIC mode
Page 4-22
Note any discrepancies in the Commissioning Form at the end of paragraph 4.
If there are other alarms, or if the link does not work, refer to the troubleshooting paragraph ( 7 in this
manual).
In case of "GE" or "tributary" alarm, check the access configuration and connections.
Note: there may still be some alarms at this stage.
Frequency Scan at ODU input

Received Signal Level
Gigabit Ethernet transmission test
2 Mbit/s channel test (optional)
Wayside access test (optional)
Alarm In/Out test (optional)
1+1 switching check (optional)
BER measurement
Gigabit Ethernet tester

2 Mbit/s bit error rate analyzer (optional)
Digital multimeter
Gigabit Ethernet
tester
Tx / Rx loopback
(in case of optical port)
Test setup used with SFP optics (using a single tester and a loop TX / RX on the remote site):
Test setup used with SFP optical or electrical (use a tester locally and on the remote site):
The Gigabit Ethernet tester is connected to a GE port of the local terminal. On the remote terminal, the
corresponding GE output is looped back on the input by a fiber of optical interface.
Page 4-24
Coupling and connection losses for a 1+1 system.
Page 4-23
Free space path attenuation depending on hop length and frequency.
Local and remote antenna gains.
A Gigabit Ethernet tester is required to take the measurement. The measurement block diagram is
given below:
It is used to test Ethernet transmission over the entire link.
This test is carried out to check for correct transmission of Gigabit Ethernet signals.
The test must be carried out on each port used.
4.5.3 - Giga Ethernet transmission test
Record the ODU RSL values of the link on the commissioning form.
A difference of more than 5 dB, however, indicates a problem such as incorrect antenna alignment, a
propagation problem or bad polarization on one of the two antennas.
First check the antenna alignment and polarization. If the problem remains, refer to the
troubleshooting guide in paragraph 7 and replace the defective element.
So, if the difference between the receive level displayed by the Pilot and the receive level expected by
the link budget calculation is within the tolerance 5 dB, the installation is considered to be correct.
We see that in the worst case, for a 1+0 type system, the maximum uncertainty is 7 dB (2 1 1 3):
In practice, the typical uncertainty to be considered is 5 dB.
The following tolerances must be taken into account:

x 2 dB for the transmit power.
x 1 dB for the gain of each antenna.
x 3 dB for the received level measurement displayed on the Pilot.
x 0.5 dB for 1+1 coupler losses.
Compare the actual received signal level displayed on the main screen of the Pilot software, with the
expected signal level:
Remote Transmit Power.
Under normal weather conditions, the receive signal level depends on the following parameters:
4.5.2 - Receive signal level
Important: do not run a frequency scan from a remote site.
Note in the commissioning form the presence of any interferers at the received frequency as well as
on the adjacent channels (first adjacent and second adjacent).
The "Frequency scan" procedure is described in 6.24 -.
In order to check interferer level at the received frequency, the remote transmitter must be switched off
during the test.
After acquisition, the spectrum is displayed graphically. This measurement reveals the presence of
any interferers. A record of this measurement is stored in the IDU flash memory and can be consulted
afterwards using the Pilot or via the network management.
The Pilot software can be used to take an automatic measurement of the spectrum around the receive
frequency without the need for external instruments. The measurement must be taken locally,
successively at each end of the link.
Measurement is carried out with the local transmitter off (the Pilot software automatically sets the local
transmitter to "mute", to avoid sending signals which could disturb other receivers.
4.5.1 - Frequency Scan
A SLF-H Commissioning Form is provided at the end of paragraph 4 in order to record the results of
the tests carried out together with any remarks made during installation and commissioning.
x
x
x
Measurement equipment required:
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
After installing and setting the link, check correct operation by performing the following tests and
measurements:
4.5 - TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS REQUIRED
Gigabit Ethernet
tester
Page 4-25
Define the configuration for each end of the link: modulation, radio channel, number of active
E1 tributaries (optional).
Choice of transmission configuration
The test will be declared positive is no packets are lost and if the throughput measured is not less than
the limit specified. This limit depends mainly on the configuration: modulation, radio band and number
of associated optional E1s. (Refer to the performance datasheets to obtain the Ethernet bandwidth
available according to the link configuration).
The test consists in measuring the throughput according to RFC 2544 for long enough to check the
quality of the link.
The Gigabit Ethernet TX tester is connected on a GE port local terminal. On the remote terminal is
connected the output GE corresponding to the input of the tester RX.
Gigabit Ethernet
tester
Define a Unicast flow to be transmitted:

Define the size of this flow. Standard RFC2544 recommends the following sizes: 64,
128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, 1518 bytes. SLF-H also supports frame sizes from 64 to
2048 bytes. Choose one of these sizes.
Define the test duration.
The throughput defined by standard RFC2544 characterizes the maximum data rate that
can be transmitted without losses. This parameter depends on the transmission
configuration and the associated Ethernet features (e.g. QoS).
Define a throughput (generally called ILOAD on an Ethernet tester) less than or equal to
the throughput specified for the configuration defined.
x
x
Page 4-26
Make the physical loopback on GE port #n of the remote equipment.
On the remote IDU:
Number of Gigabit Ethernet ports to be considered: 1

The Ethernet tester is connected to GE port #n of the IDU under test, where n = 1, 2, 3
or 4.
GE port #n of the IDU must be configured in "Enable" mode.
Configure the tester so that it takes into account the type of SFP module installed on the
IDU: electrical or optical. If the operator uses optical SFP modules, auto negotiation
must be activated on the tester.
The tester must be connected to the GE port to be tested. It is configured as follows:
On the local IDU:
Launch the tester script (frame loss test): check that no frames are lost.
Check that there are no SFP alarms (GE Leds green).
QoS mode: "Disable".

Jumbo frame mode: "Disable".
Port mode: "Enable" for port #n being tested (local and remote equipment).
Configure the interface according to the SFP module type.
x Configure each Ethernet port of the equipment as follows:
Choice of Ethernet configuration:
Page 4-27
BER test
2 Mbit/s
Internal clock
PRBS: 215-1.
120 Ohm balanced, or 75 Ohm unbalanced interface depending on IDU configuration.
Page 4-28
Click on the "Loopback" button corresponding to the tributary under test. Select a remote
loopback. See procedure in 5.4 -.
Check on the transmission analyzer that no errors occurred for one minute.
When the test is finished, disconnect the cable, change the alarm in invert mode (I) and
remove the remote loopback.
Repeat this test on each 2 Mbit/s channel used on the site.
Record the results on the commissioning form.
x
x
x
Connect the transmission analyzer to the 2 Mbit/s input, respecting the impedance selected
in the IDU. The tributary alarm should now be cleared.
There should be a "tributary" alarm, the "Trib" Led of the equipment and its image on the
Pilot screen must be red.
Click on one of the "TRIB" connectors Shelf view or use the menu
"Configuration / E1 Tributaries / Local".
Check that the channel under test is configured in normal mode (N), in service (blank
button) and no loopback (blank button).
All other tributaries should be unconnected and configured as inverted (I).
All channels designed to transport traffic must be tested one by one:
x
x
x
x
x
These tests must be carried out on both terminals of the link. A 2 Mbit/s transmission analyzer is
required, which must be set with the following parameters:
4.5.4 - 2 Mbit/s tributary test (optional)
Throughput
(Mbps)
1.25
64
1.05
128
0.96
0.96
Frame size
256
512
0.95
1280
0.96
1518
0.96
1760
Page 4-29
Check that the Wayside port is "on" (box checked, when Wayside is selected under Port Id) on both
IDUs (Configuration / Management Network / Ethernet Ports and Radio Channel menu).
0.96
1024
Number of Ethernet ports to be considered: 1.

Configure the tester in 10/100 Mbps auto negotiated mode.
Define a unicast flow of size n bytes. (64 n 1760).
Depending on the size of the Ethernet frame to be transmitted, define an ILOAD less than
or equal to the specified throughput in the following table:
Configuration common to local and remote equipment:
x
x
x
x
Tester configuration:
Note: the throughout is the same irrespective of the configuration (modulation / radio channel).
The test consists in checking that the transmission has no losses on this access at the specified
throughput.
A 10/100BaseT Ethernet tester is required to perform this test. As when testing the GE ports, make a
physical loopback on the remote terminal RJ45 access by connecting pins 1 and 3 together and 2 and
6 together.
The same procedure is used to test the Wayside port and the main Gigabit Ethernet ports.
4.5.5 - Wayside test (optional)
Start the test (frame loss): check that no frames are lost.
Check that there are no Wayside alarms on the equipment (Wayside Led green,
Alarms / View / Local). On the screenshot below, Wayside alarm is present.
Page 4-30
Switch "On" the local ODU mute (the link with the remote ODU must be cut).
An IDU alarm can be easily simulated by entering a wrong Link ID code in the local terminal. This
wrong ID Code generates an IDU alarm, but does not affect the radio transmission. Apply the following
procedure:
4.5.6.1 - Simulating an IDU Alarm
It is not possible to simulate all possible alarms without opening the equipment: for example,
simulating a Tx frequency alarm would require opening the ODU and disturbing the transmission
synthesizer phase loop.
However some alarms can be simulated simply, without having to carry out any operations on the
equipment.
If alarm relays and/or external alarm inputs are used on the site, the tests described below must be
carried out to check correct operation.
These tests must be carried out on each terminal. Before starting the tests, check that no faults are
displayed by the equipment.
SLF-H includes 3 fully programmable relay outputs. Internal or external alarms can be assigned to
each relay.
SLF-H can manage 5 local external alarms and 5 remote external alarms (image of the 5 external
alarms of the remote IDU).
If some external alarms are to be managed, it is necessary first to configure them (see 5.6 -).
4.5.6 - Alarm relay test (optional)
Change the Link ID Code of the local terminal.

Switch "Off" the local ODU mute; an IDU alarm should be displayed: front panel "idu" Led,
and its representation on the Pilot screen must be red.
Check that the alarm disappears when the pin is disconnected from the ground.
The "ext" Led on the IDU front panel and its image on the Pilot screen must be red.
Page 4-31
Identify the pin of the 15-pin DB connector corresponding to the alarm input. Assuming that the alarm
is in "N" configuration, connect this pin to ground and observe the changes on the front panel of the
IDU and on the Pilot screens.
To simulate a custom alarm, use the Pilot menu Configuration / Alarms / Local - IDU tab.
Depending on the alarm convention, select "N" if a closed loop corresponds to the alarm state, or "I" if
an open loop corresponds to the alarm state.
In order to test a specific external alarm, first disable all other external alarms.
4.5.6.6 - Testing an external alarm
When the test is finished, do not forget to restore the initial settings.
First check that the ATPC is OFF.

An RSL alarm can be simulated by reducing the remote terminal power and choosing a suitable RSL
alarm threshold, e.g. -60 dBm.
Decrease the remote transmit power in order to have a receive level below -60 dBm. Take care not to
drop below the link operating threshold, since the link cannot be restored from the local terminal.
The equipment "RSL" Led and its image on the Pilot screen must be red.
4.5.6.5 - Simulating an RSL alarm
A tributary alarm is easily obtained by changing the configuration from normal (N) to invert (I), or vice
versa.
The equipment "trib" Led and its image on the Pilot screen must be red.
When the test is finished, do not forget to restore the initial configuration.
4.5.6.4 - Simulating a tributary alarm
Put back the SFP module without plugging the Ethernet cable: an "SFP LOS" alarm is triggered; the
equipment "GbE Lnk/Act" Led stays out, the "GE" Led of the Pilot screen and the "SFP LOS" Led in
the alarm detail becomes red.
Take the SFP module out of its housing: an "SFP Presence" alarm is triggered; the equipment "GbE
Lnk/Act" Led goes out, the "GE" Led of the Pilot screen and the "SFP Presence" Led in the alarm
detail becomes red.
Two alarms can be easily obtained:
4.5.6.3 - Simulating a Gigabit Ethernet Alarm
The equipment "ODU" Led and its image on the Pilot screen must be red.
An ODU alarm can be generated by removing the cable to the ODU.
4.5.6.2 - Simulating an ODU Alarm
Once the test is finished, do not forget to put back the correct Link ID code using the same procedure.
x
x
Page 4-32
M 2 (R)
Tx 2 (R)
Rx 2 (R)
M 2 (L)
Tx 2 (L)
Rx 2 (L)
Figure 4.7 - Local transmitter 1 and local receiver 1 active
M 1 (R)
Tx 1 (R)
Rx 1 (R)
M 1 (L)
Tx 1 (L)
Rx 1 (L)
When the link is in operation and there are no faults, the configuration is as follows:
(note: L = local, R= remote).
In the figures below, the active transmitter and receiver are written in bold.
In 1+1 Hot Stand By configuration, since asymmetric couplers are used (6 dB), the activation of
Revertive automatic switching Tx allows, when channel 1 is restored, to have a better system gain
assessment (weaker coupler losses in emission and reception).
In Hot Stand By mode or in Space Diversity mode, only one transmitter is active, the other is in
position "Mute". In Frequency Diversity mode, the two transmitters operate permanently, transmitting
at two different frequencies, and only the receivers are switched.
These tests must be carried out on both ends of the link and require the presence of personnel in each
station.
1+1 systems require additional tests compared with unprotected systems. These tests are carried out
to check that all parts are operational and that the switching system operates correctly.
4.5.7 - Testing 1+1 configuration (optional)
Simulate various alarms and test the operation of the relays as explained above.
When the IDU is powered up and there is an alarm on the relay under test:
x NC is connected to Common
x NO is in open circuit
When the IDU is powered and when there is no alarm:

x NO is connected to common
x NC is in open circuit
When the IDU is not powered, NC is connected to the common point of the relay.
The 3 contacts of each relay are available on the 15-pin DB connector (see Figure 3.10 and Figure
3.11, Table 3-2 - "Alarm IN/OUT" connector pinout).
A multimeter is required for this test, to check continuity between the relay contacts.
4.5.6.7 - Testing the alarm outputs (relays)
M 2 (R)
Tx 2 (R)
Rx 2 (R)
M 2 (L)
Tx 2 (L)
Rx 2 (L)
M 2 (R)
Tx 2 (R)
Rx 2 (R)
M2 (L)
Tx 2 (L)
Rx 2 (L)
Use the same procedure from the remote terminal.
The system is now in automatic mode, the orange maintenance Led is off.
Page 4-33
If Revertive automatic switching Tx is off, the system will remain on the channel 2; no error will be
displayed.
If Revertive automatic switching Tx is on, the system should return to the channel 1 transmitter.
Note: transmit switching will cause errors.
Select again automatic switching by clicking on the "Tx Auto" and "Rx Auto" boxes.
Clear the counter and check that in this configuration, the transmission is carried out without error.
Figure 4.9 - Local transmitter 2 and local receiver 2 active
M 1 (R)
Tx 1 (R)
Rx 1 (R)
M 1 (L)
Tx 1 (L)
Rx 1 (L)
A transmit switching causes errors (or frame losses). The number of errors counted by the analyzer
should be less than 2,048106 (maximum time of switching equal to 1s).
From the local terminal, in the same menu, select the channel 2 transmitter by clicking on the Tx2 box.
Switching between receivers should be error free. There should be no transmission errors for at least
a minute.
Figure 4.8 - Local transmitter1 and local receiver 2 active
M 1 (R)
Tx 1 (R)
Rx 1 (R)
M 1 (L)
Tx 1 (L)
Rx 1 (L)
Select the channel 2 receiver by clicking on the Rx2 box, and validate.
From the local terminal, in "Super User" mode, select menu "Maintenance/Tx/Rx Forcing" or click on
"Tx" on the main screen to access the manual switching command (refer to 6.22 -).
From the local terminal, connect a BER analyzer on one of the 2 Mbit/s channels and make a remote
loopback for this channel (see procedure in section 5.4 -). If there is no E1 installed, make a Gigabit
Ethernet test (as specified in paragraph 4.5.3 -). Check that there are no errors (or no frame loss) for
at least a minute (nominal RSL conditions, ATPC OFF).
Page 4-34
Check all the boxes and click on "Save As".

Save the file in the PC using a name indicating the local site and the remote site:
Open the "File/System Report" menu, the following screen is displayed:
Link configuration information
The configuration information can be recorded by the Pilot into files. These files must be attached to
the commissioning form
4.5.9 - Recording configuration information
Other durations could be considered upon request, but this will require Sagemcom approval.
x 30 minutes for low capacity links (GSM, Wifi, etc.),

x 24 hours for medium and high capacity links.
The duration of the BER test depends on the type of network and the criticality of the links.
Generally:
For a 1+1 link, only the quality on the main ODUs in automatic switching mode will be tested.
The test is either carried out with the arrangement as described in paragraph 4.5.3 - or that described in
paragraph 4.5.4 -.
Since the bit error rates on the Gigabit Ethernet train and on the E1s are the same, it is simpler to carry
out this test on an E1 tributary
The link quality can either be measured on a Gigabit Ethernet port or on one or more chained E1 ports
(if the option is installed).
4.5.8 - Quality measurement
Configurations are loaded via the menu: File/IDU Configuration/Local or Remote/Load.
"[remote site name] [local site name].sav", for the remote terminal.
"[local site name] [remote site name].sav", for the local terminal.
Chose a file name indicating the names of the sites on the two ends of the link, e.g.:
To configurations are saved via the menu: "File/IDU Configuration/Local or Remote/Save".
Page 4-35
The configurations can be saved in files on the PC. If the IDU or the ODU is replaced, these files can
be used to reload the configuration quickly.
Saving local and remote terminal configurations
This text file contains information used to configure the local and remote sites, as well as information
regarding the hardware and software versions (serial numbers, manufacturing date, versions, etc.). To
print the file, click on "Print".
"[local site name] [remote site name].txt".
GE4
GE3
GE2
GE1
Antenna type:
IDU to ODU cable length:
Transmit frequency:
Antenna type:
IDU to ODU cable length:
Transmit frequency:
1000 Mbps
1000 Mbps
1000 Mbps
1000 Mbps
protected E1
Name:
Remote site
SX optical LX optical Electrical

Auto
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
Half Duplex Full Duplex
Auto
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
Auto
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
Auto
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
split E1
56 MHz
Name:
Page 4-36
GE Tx Mute Profile
QPSK low
QPSK high
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM low
256QAM med
256QAM high
16 32 48 64 80
28 MHz
Mode if in 2+0:
All E1 on one channel
For the configuration compatibility see Table 4-2
14 MHz
QPSK low
Mode if in 1+1:
QPSK high
Max throughput 16QAM
Max protection 32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM low
256QAM med
256QAM hgh
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
MaxProfile
ACM
Fixed
7 MHz
Page 1/3
1+1 FD
1+1 SD
2+0 XPIC
MUX32 SPDH
1+0
1+1 HSB
2+0 FD
MUX64 SPDH
Local site
Giga Ethernet interfaces
Optional E1s active
Radio channel
Modulation
Configuration
Date:
Link name:
Customer:
Commissioning Form
SLF-H
VDC
MUX64 Input voltage:
Measured XPI* :
Measured on Channel
dB
1 2
Measured XPI* :
Measured on Channel
Wayside *:
1+1 configuration *:
OK NOK
OK NOK
Wayside *:
1+1 configuration *:
OK
2 Mbit/s tributary quality tests *
(*) Optional
Number of Errors:
Duration:
Number of frame losses :
OK
Alarms / loops *:
OK NOK
Alarms / loops *:
Giga Ethernet quality test
2Mbit/s tributary tests *:
OK NOK
2Mbit/s tributary tests *:
Duration:
Giga Ethernet tests:
OK NOK
Giga Ethernet tests:
*XPI=RSLPOL - RSLXPOL
Channel 2
V H
Channel 2
*XPI=RSLPOL - RSLXPOL
Channel 1
V H
(If in XPIC mode)
(If in XPIC mode)
Channel 1
Channel 2
Measured
Channel 2
Difference
NOK
NOK
OK NOK
OK NOK
OK NOK
OK NOK
OK NOK
1 2
dB
V H
Page 4-37
Difference
V H
Expected
VDC
VDC
Page 2/3
RSL at ODU access (dBm)
MUX64 Input voltage:
Channel 1
Expected
Remote site
IDU Input voltage:
Channel 1
Measured
RSL at ODU access (dBm)
VDC
IDU Input voltage:
Local site
TEST RESULTS
Commissioning Form
SLF-H
Diskette
CD-ROM
Other
Page 4-38
Other:
BER measurement file
Notes
Page 3/3
File retrieved via the "File/IDU Configuration/Remote/Save" menu
File retrieved via the "File/IDU Configuration/Local /Save" menu
File retrieved via the "File/System Report/Save As" menu
Reference(s):
Attached electronic documents
Commissioning Form
SLF-H
Gigabit Ethernet access configuration.
2 Mbit/s access configuration.
BER and RSL alarm thresholds.
Configuration of local or external alarms, their severity, relays.
Commissioning if necessary and configuration of Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC).
1+1 Switching configuration.
Page 5-1
Click on "Synchronize" then "Apply" to transfer PC date and time to the equipments, independently
for the local and remote terminals or for both at the same time.
The date of local and remote equipment can be modified.
Click at the bottom left of the Pilot main screen to display the following screen:
5.2 - SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
Enter the site names of the two terminals in "Site Name".
5.1 - ENTERING SITE NAMES
Useful information stored in the IDU memory, e.g. site names and some information which it
could be useful to consult or load later.
Once the link is established, the configuration must be finalized via the Pilot, still in "Super User"
mode. The following parameters must still be entered:
5. FINAL LINK CONFIGURATION
4BFINAL LINK CONFIGURATION
Page 5-2
Configuration->Gigabit Ethernet->Ethernet port configuration->local/remote
The first step in configuring Ethernet is to setup Ethernet port. The port configuration window can be
found in the Pilot menu here:
5.3.2 - Ethernet Port configuration
4 classes of service are available on each port. Very High priority is the SP (Strict priority) class,
High priority is the WRR (Weighted round robin) 16 class, Normal priority is the WRR 8 class, and
Low priority is WRR 4 class.
Since IFG and preamble are remote by line interfaces, switch component only deal with L2
bandwidth. In this document and in the Pilot software, each bandwidth, unless specified, correspond
to a L2 bandwidth.
L2band = L1band * (frame size) / (frame size + 20)
Ethernet bandwidth can be stated L1 or L2. This refers to OSI layers. At L2 (layer 2), each frame is
composed of source address, destination address, EtherType field, and CRC field. At L1 (layer 1)
each frame is composed of the L2 frame, plus a preamble, and a minimum silence period must be
ensured between two frames (IFG, Inter Frame Gap). These additional fields represent 20 bytes.
The bandwidth used for port speed is L1 bandwidth (10M, 100M, or 1000M). For a given frame size,
the L2 corresponding bandwidth can be computed this way:
In this document, the front panel Ethernet ports (SFP slots) will be referred to as GE1, GE2, GE3
and GE4 ports. The radio port allowing transmission to remote equipment will be referred to as GER
or Radio port.
5.3.1 - Notations used in this manual
The principle for transmission of Ethernet frames and the specific functions that can be associated
with them are described in 2. It is strongly recommended to read this chapter before using the
advanced Ethernet configuration capabilities.
SLF-H can be used to transmit Ethernet frames simultaneously or not with 2 Mbit/s tributaries.
5.3 - CONFIGURING GIGABIT ETHERNET
So, for example, with a 100Mbps port speed, the automatic shaping value will be 76.1Mbps.
L2bandwidth = L1bandwidth * 64/84
Page 5-3
The bandwidth limitation for GE ports is the physical L1 bandwidth. Shaping is enforced in the
switch (at L2). When automatic mode is selected, the L2 shaping must be computed based on the
worst case of L2 to L1 bandwidth conversion. The worst case corresponds to the smallest frames. In
this case, the L2 bandwidth is:
To enforce QOS in EPLAN and EVPLAN configuration (see chapter 5.3.4 -), a shaping must be
applied to each port. If no shaping is applied on the port, and congestion occurs on egress pipeline
of this port, frame will be dropped randomly (no QOS is applied). If no congestion occurs on the
port, the shaping is not useful.
Additional configuration is available for Ethernet ports.
5.3.2.2 - Advanced configuration
The Ethernet port Configuration must be coherent between the two sides of Ethernet
Cable. If SLF port is in auto negotiation configuration, the equipment connected to
SLF must be in auto negotiation too. The same applies to a forced mode.
For 1000Mbps speed, only full duplex mode is available.
For electrical SFP, auto-negotiation mode can be either enabled or disabled. If auto-negotiation is
disabled, it is possible to configure port speed and duplex mode.
For Each port (1 to 4), the SFP type must be configured (either Copper, or Fiber LX, or Fiber SX).
Each port can be configured as disabled. Disabled ports will not link up, and thus will not carry any
traffic. Unused ports should be disabled to prevent eavesdrop issues.
5.3.2.1 - Physical configuration
Page 5-4
Disabled:
In this mode, no shaping is applied. Full L1 bandwidth can be used at any time, but QOS
is not enforced on egress side of the target port
Manual:
In this mode, a value can be entered (in 100kbps unit) to define the L2 shaping applied on
the port. Take care to set a value lower than the automatic value if QOS must be
enforced.
Relative:
In this mode, a percentage of the port shaping will be taken as the Very High priority
queue bandwidth limit. For example if port shaping is 76.1Mbps, and 10% is entered,
SPTC shaping will be 7.6Mbps. If no port shaping is applied (port shaping mode set to
disable), the percentage is applied on the L1 port speed. For example if port speed is
100Mbps, and the percentage is set to 10%, the SPTC shaping will be 10Mbps.
Absolute:
An absolute value should be entered (in 100kbps unit) to limit the bandwidth of Very High
priority queue.
Disable:
No SPTC shaping is applied. Traffic on Very High priority queue will not be limited (except
by port shaping if any).
-
The following SPTC modes are available:
The SPTC shaping can be either configured globally (see chapter 5.3.3 -) or per port. If
configuration is per port, a SPTC shaping may be defined for each port (GE ports and Radio port)
In addition to port shaping, a SPTC (Strict Priority Traffic Class) shaping may be applied. This
shaping limits the rate of traffic passing through the Very High priority queue (other queues are not
affected).
On radio port, port shaping is automatically applied, and can be improved with adaptive shaping
feature (see chapter 5.3.3 -).
By default the shaping is mode is automatic, if in doubt, leave the configuration to default.
Automatic:
in this mode, QOS is enforced on the target port, and shaping value is automatically
computed.
The following port shaping modes are available:
To avoid facing this limitation, if needed, the port shaping of each port can be configured.
By applying the automatic value on a port, the equipment ensures that in any case, the QOS will be
enforced on this egress port. The drawback is that for larger frames than 64 bytes, not all the L1
bandwidth will be used. For example with 1500 bytes frames, the L1 maximum bandwidth will be
77.1Mbps. Equipment also take into account additional SVLAN tag that might be added to frames,
according to configuration.
Page 5-5
SPTC shaping:
This setting allow to configure globally for all ports the shaping applied to Strict Priority
(Very High) queue. This shaping limits the bandwidth available to services in Strict Priority.
If set to "Disable", no SPTC shaping is applied on any port (no bandwidth limitation).
If set to "All ports", a relative SPTC shaping is applied to all ports. The SPTC shaping
value is based on the percentage configured in "SP TC Shaping Value" field. The
bandwidth limitation is the percentage of the port L2 shaping or (if no port shaping is
Jumbo frame mode:

When jumbo frame mode is set to "Disable", switch can transmit frames size comprise
between 64 and 2048 bytes.
When jumbo frame mode is set to "Enable", switch can transmit frame size comprise
between 64 and 10000 bytes. Between two local ports (no using the radio) frame size with
jumbo mode can go up to 10256.
It is recommended to set this parameter to "Enable" since it allows gaining some Mbps of
bandwidth and the latency increase is nearly nothing (less than 1s typical).
Adaptive shaping:
When QOS mode is set to enable, adaptive shaping mode might be set to "Enable".
Adaptive shaping feature enhances radio port shaping automatic configuration (it takes
into account the statistical size of frames in shaping calculation). This result in a higher
available bandwidth over the radio port. The drawback is a slight delay on the
transmission, making the latency a little bit higher.
It is recommended to set this parameter to "Enable".
QOS mode:
While QOS Mode is set to "Disable", no shaping is performed on any port. No QOS is
enforced on any port (including radio port). And mode is equivalent to 4 EPLINE. This
means that frame that ingress on a local port will be sent to the radio port, and frames that
ingress from the radio port can be sent to any GE port (according to FDB) or flooded.
If QOS mode is set to "Enable", Radio port shaping is enforced, and QOS & services
configuration window is available for QOS configuration. Note that it is strongly
recommended to check QOS and services configuration if QOS is enabled (see chapter
5.3.4 -).
Configuration->Gigabit Ethernet->Advanced configuration->Global QOS configuration->local/remote
The QOS global configuration window can be found in the Pilot menu here:
5.3.3 - QOS Global configuration
Page 5-6
The top part of the window (Service type/metering ) is global equipment configuration.
Below is a screenshot of the window in the default equipment configuration:
Configuration->Gigabit Ethernet->Advanced configuration->QOS and Services configuration>local/remote
When QOS mode is set to "Enable", Access to the QOS and services configuration window is
granted. The window can be found in the Pilot menu here:
5.3.4 - QOS & services configuration
defined) the L1 port speed. The resulting SP TC value can de different from one port to
the other if port shaping is not the same.
If set to "Per port", the global configuration is ignored, and the configuration defined for
each port is applied. (note that in other modes, port configuration is ignored). See chapter
5.3.2.2 -for details.
EPLAN, EVPLINE/EVPLAN selection tab
Page 5-7
Main mode selection
Page 5-8
For each classification defined on any port, a service must be defined (S-VLAN column in the
following screenshot).
SVLAN tags can be pushed/popped on ingress/egress frames, or kept if already tagged. Three port
modes are available, UNI-N, I-NNI, and E-NNI (see chapter 5.3.4.2 - for more information regarding
ports mode and tagging possibilities).
In EVPLINE/EVPLAN mode, frames can be switched between all ports involved in a given service
(SVLAN). Each port can be involved in more than one service. QOS is performed on all ports.
5.3.4.1.4 - EVPLINE/EVPLAN
No tagging action can be performed in this mode. Though Ingress frames can contain one (or more)
VLAN tags. This is equivalent to ports being configured as UNI, internally using SVLAN service 1.
In EPLAN mode, frames can be switched between all ports involved in this mode, including
switching between two local GE ports. QOS is performed on all ports (Radio port and GE ports).
5.3.4.1.3 - EPLAN
If a port is assigned to EPLAN, it can't be used for EVPLINE/EVPLAN, and a port assigned to
EVPLINE/EVPLAN can't be used for EPLAN. A port is assigned to a given mode as soon as a
service is created in the relevant tab (see screenshots in following sections).
Advanced mode gives access to EPLAN, EVPLINE and EVPLAN configurations.
5.3.4.1.2 - Advanced mode
QOS is only performed on the Radio port. No QOS is performed on GE ports. Thus classification
can only be defined for GE ports (see chapter 5.3.4.4 - for classification description). No port
shaping and no SPTC shaping is applied on GE ports (even if SPTC shaping is configured in Pilot
software). Only Radio port is port shaped and can be SPTC shaped.
No tagging action can be performed in this mode. Though Ingress frames can contain one (or more)
VLAN tags. This is equivalent to all ports being configured as UNI, internally using SVLAN service 1.
Frames that ingress on GE ports are sent to the radio port. Frames that ingress from the radio port
can be switched to any GE ports, according to the FDB, or flooded to all GE ports. Thus it is
possible to establish a communication between GE port 1 of local equipment and GE port 3 of
remote equipment. But two local GE ports can't exchange frames.
5.3.4.1 - Service types
Service type defines the network (or topology) behavior of the embedded switch. Two main modes
are available, 4 EPLINE and advanced. In advanced mode, ports can be involved either in EPLAN
or EVPLINE/EVPLAN mode. The configuration can be made from the "QOS and Services
configuration window", as shown in the following screenshot.
5.3.4.1.1 - 4 EPLINE mode

In this mode, switching can only be performed to/from the radio port.
The bottom part is services/classifications configuration.
The middle part of the window is port modes and port shaping and speed.
Page 5-9
Before a port mode can be modified, all classifications defined for this port must be removed.
In EVPLINE/EVPLAN mode, each GE port can be UNI-N, I-NNI, or E-NNI. Radio port is necessarily
I-NNI. Following description only concerns EVPLINE/EVPLAN mode.
Ports mode is only meaningful for EVPLINE/EVPLAN mode. For other modes, ports can be
considered to be all UNI (including Radio port), and not tagging action is performed.
5.3.4.2 - Port modes and tagging possibilities
In this example screenshot, frames can be switched between GE port 1, GE port 4 and Radio port
for service 200, and between GE port 2, GE port 3, and Radio port for service 100.
Page 5-10
Port mode selection
E-NNI stands for External Network to Network Interface. E-NNI ports are used for connections
between two networks that don't share the same QOS marking. Frames that ingress E-NNI ports
5.3.4.2.3 - E-NNI
The only type of classification available for I-NNI ports is SVLAN classification. This classification
allows filtering ingress SVLAN allowed, and services to which the port is involved. No QOS
parameter is required for this classification (see chapter 5.3.4.2.2 - for details).
I-NNI stands for Internal Network to Network Interface. I-NNI ports are used for connections
between two ports inside a trusted network. Frames that ingress I-NNI ports must be already tagged
with a SVLAN tag. The SVLAN tag will be kept (both for ingress and egress frames). The QOS
parameters (destination TC, drop precedence) used for ingress frames will be defined according to
the SP (Service Priority) field of the SVLAN tag already on the frame. I-NNI ports are trusted ports.
5.3.4.2.2 - I-NNI
Priority field of added SVLAN tag is defined according to configured classification and PCP
encoding table. See chapters 5.3.4.4.4 - for details.
UNI stands for User to Network Interface. UNI ports are tagging points, when entering/leaving a
network. Only GE ports can be defined as UNI. Ingress frames will receive an additional SVLAN tag
(push) according to the classification configuration of the port (see chapter 5.3.4 - for details).
Egress frames will loose the topmost SVLAN tag (pop). It is possible to have different services
attached to a port. Ingress frames can be already tagged or not with one or more CVLAN or
SVLAN.
5.3.4.2.1 - UNI-N
Ports mode can be configured in the QOS and Services configuration window, in the middle part of
the window, as shown in following screenshot.
Very high priority
High priority
Normal priority
Low priority
TC3
TC2
TC1
TC0
Scheduling
WRR (Weighted round robin) with weight 4
SP (Strict Priority)
Page 5-11
Strict priority means that as soon as there is a frame waiting to be transmitted in the associated TC,
it will be transmitted. Other TCs must wait for the SP TC to be empty or for the SP TC to have
reached the authorized SP TC shaped bandwidth limit (see chapter 5.3.4.3.2 - for details) to be
served.
SP Scheduling:
Description
TC
4 classes of service are available on each port. Each TC (Traffic Class) has a specific scheduling
mode. Below is a list of the available TCs and the associated Scheduling mode:
5.3.4.3.1 - Available classes of service
5.3.4.3 - QOS parameters
EtherType used for CVLAN tags (used for CVLAN Id classification) cannot be configured, and is
standard value 0x8100.
Ether type configuration
The EtherType value is the value that will be used for SVLAN tag added to ingress frames for UNI-N
ports. On NNI ports, ingress frame must be tagged with a SVLAN tag using the configured
EtherType.
In EVPLINE/EVPLAN mode, the EtherType used for SVLAN services can be configured. The
default value is 0x88A8. Any 2bytes value can be used, including the value used for CVLAN
(0x8100).
5.3.4.2.4 - EtherType
The only type of classification available for E-NNI ports is SVLAN classification. This classification
allows filtering ingress SVLAN allowed, and services to which the port is involved. QOS parameter
is required for this classification and SP field of SVLAN tag will be rewritten accordingly (see chapter
5.3.4.2.3 - for details).
Page 5-12
SPTC Shaper
Egress pipeline
5.3.4.3.3 - Metering and policing
Note: SP TC can only be used if metering is disabled.
SP TC can be either disabled, or configured globally as a percentage of the port shaped bandwidth
(or port speed if no shaping is applied on the port), or configured per port. Per port configuration can
be disabled, a percentage of the port shaped bandwidth, or a manually configured value. Chapter
5.3.3 - and 5.3.2.2 - describe the SP TC configuration.
Strict priority shaping (or SPTC shaping) can be configured to allow limiting SP TC available
bandwidth. In some conditions, the traffic rate classified in SP TC (TC3) can't be controlled. If traffic
in SP TC uses all the bandwidth available on a port, other WRR TCs will not be served at all. To
avoid this situation, it is possible to configure a SP TC shaping, limiting the bandwidth only for the
traffic of SP TC. In this case only a part of the port bandwidth might be used for SP TC, and the rest
of the bandwidth is always available for WRR TCs.
5.3.4.3.2 - Strict priority shaping
TC0 (WRR 4)
TC1 (WRR 8)
TC2 (WRR 16)
TC3 (SP)
Bellow is a diagram of egress side of a port:
In case of congestion, depending on the time a frame spend waiting in a TC queue, the latency can
vary. To achieve low latency applications, use higher priority TC than the rest of the traffic. For
example voice traffic should be classified inside TC3.
When SP TC is empty or at its limit rate, the remaining bandwidth is shared between the WRR TCs.
The weights of the different WRR TCs define the relative bandwidth that can egress from each
WRR TC. Thus, when congestion occurs, the available bandwidth of each WRR TC will depend on
its weight and on the load of the other WRR TCs. WRR ensure that a minimum throughput will be
available at anytime for each TC, and allow to control, in case of congestion, the relative bandwidth
available for each TC.
WRR Scheduling:
WRR Scheduler
must be already tagged with a SVLAN tag. The SVLAN tag will be kept (both for ingress and egress
frames), but SP field will be rewritten for ingress frames. The QOS parameters (destination TC, drop
precedence) used for ingress frames will be defined according to the classification configuration. ENNI ports are distrusted ports.
Port Scheduler
Port Shaper
Below screenshot shows an example with CIR value defined for some classifications:
Metering is performed on the ingress side.
Page 5-13
For UNI ports, the CIR defined for a classification is applied differently according to the equipment
mode. If mode is EPLINE or EPLAN, the CIR is the limit for the flow identified by the classification
it's configured for. If mode is EVPLINE or EVPLAN, the CIR is the limit for the total bandwidth used
by all flows (classifications) that share the same service (SVLAN) on the port it's defined on. In the
screenshot below, CVLAN 20 and 30 share the same SVLAN 300 on port 1. The limit for the
bandwidth of both CVLAN cumulated is 5Mbps (even if 5Mbps is displayed for each of them). The
CIR is share between these two. CIR for SVLAN 300 on other ports (for example port 2) is
independent.
For I-NNI ports, according to PCP encoding (5.3.4.4.4 - ), the CIR value might be required. If PCP
encoding already include a drop precedence information (for example 5P3D encoding), the drop
precedence from the SP field of SVLAN tag is used to define drop precedence. Thus no CIR value
is required. Green frames have no drop precedence, and Yellow frame have drop precedence. If the
PCP encoding mode doesn't include drop precedence information (for example 8P0D encoding), a
CIR value must be defined for each SVLAN classification.
Equipment performs a two color marking for the metering (Green and Yellow) which is called SrTcm
(Single rate, Two color marking). When metering is enabled, for each classification, a CIR value
must be entered. Equipment will monitor the used bandwidth for each classification, and compare it
with CIR value. If the used bandwidth is bellow the CIR, all frames in the associated flow will be
marked Green. Otherwise, part of the frames will be marked Yellow, and part of the frames will be
marked Green, so that the bandwidth for Green frames is equal to the CIR value.
Metering:
Metering configuration can be found on the top of the QOS and Services configuration window, as
shown in the following screenshot:
It is possible to perform metering and policing actions on the equipment. Metering configuration is
global to the equipment and if turned on, metering and policing will be performed on all
classifications.
Page 5-14
Policing:
To give more freedom of configuration, no CIR oversubscription limit is implemented in

either Equipment or Pilot software. User must be careful to avoid oversubscription while
configuring QOS
Note: Metering can only be enabled if flow control is disabled.
Note: TC priority (scheduling) acts on top of policing. Thus the CIR bandwidth can only be
guaranteed within the bandwidth available to that TC (see 5.3.4.3.4 - for TC bandwidth calculation
examples).
When queuing frame in a WRR TC (TC2, TC1, TC0), Green frames will be queued normally, and
Yellow frame will be queued only if queue is not too heavily loaded (enough free space in the queue
is available). The result of this behavior is that when a classified traffic exceeds the CIR value,
Yellow frames will be dropped while Green frames pass through. Thus the traffic below CIR will
pass through without loss while traffic above CIR will be shaped if needed.
When queuing frame in SP TC (TC3, very high priority), Green frames will be queued normally, and
Yellow frame will be automatically dropped (whatever the queue status). Thus the egress bandwidth
of the traffic classified on SP TC will never go above the CIR limit.
On the egress side, queuing in the different TCs will depend on the frame color and destination TC.
CIR value
Below screenshot shows a classification add window with metering enabled:
Egress Load
50M
28.6M
14.3M
7.1M
Port shaping: 100M

SPTC shaping: 50M
Ingress Load
10M
20M
1000M
1000M
Egress Load
10M
20M
46.6M
23.3M
(100M 10M 20M) x 8 / (8+4) = 46.6M
Page 5-15
But TC2 is only loaded with 20M. Thus the total 20M of TC2 pass through, and the rest of the
bandwidth is shared between TC1 and TC0. TC1 egress rate is then:
(100M 10M) x 16 / (16+8+4) = 51.4M
In this example, TC3 load is under the SPTC shaping. Thus all traffic rate on TC3 is not limited, and
10M egress from TC3. Other WRR queues share the remaining bandwidth (90M) according to their
weights. The load for TC2 should be:
TC
TC3 (SP)
TC2 (WRR 16)
TC1 (WRR 8)
TC0 (WRR 4)
3)
Same goes for TC1 and TC0.
(100M - 50M) x 16 / (16+8+4) = 28.6M
In this example, TC3 load is higher than the SPTC shaping. The egress rate of TC3 is limited by the
SPTC shaping, thus available egress rate for TC3 is 50M. Other WRR queues share the remaining
bandwidth (100-50 = 50M) according to their weights. The load for TC2 for example is:
TC
TC3 (SP)
TC2 (WRR 16)
TC1 (WRR 8)
TC0 (WRR 4)
Port shaping: 100M

SPTC shaping: 50M
Ingress Load
1000M
1000M
1000M
1000M
Page 5-16
Classification can be defined and seen from the QOS and Services configuration window, on the
bottom part, as shown below.
- A CIR value (if metering is enabled, default values is 0 and is ignored if metering is disabled).
- A Service or SVLAN (default to 1 for all classification in EPLINE or EPLAN)
- A priority (One of the destination TC, if port mode is not I-NNI)
- A classification type (with specific classification type parameters, for eg. VLAN Id)
- An ingress port
A classification is a set of up to 5 parameters:
When QOS is enabled, all frames that ingress the equipment must be classified. All unclassified
traffic will be dropped by equipment.
When QOS is disabled, no classification can be configured. In this case, all traffic competes on a
best effort basis to use the available Ethernet or Radio port physical bandwidth. Frames will be
randomly dropped.
2)
Egress Load
100M
0M
0M
0M
5.3.4.4.1 - Classification principle

Classification goal is to distinguish traffic flows and assign them to services and apply different level
of QOS on them. Several criteria can be used to classify traffic (see 5.3.4.4.2 - ).
In EVPLINE/EVPLAN, classification also allows defining to which service a given traffic belongs (for
other modes, the classifications defaults to service 1).
Port shaping: 100M

SPTC shaping: none
Ingress Load
1000M
1000M
1000M
1000M
5.3.4.4 - Services and QOS configuration
(100M 10M 20M) x 4 / (8+4) = 23.3M
TC0 egress rate is then:
In this example, No SPTC is configured, and TC3 use more bandwidth than port shaping. Thus TC3
takes all the available bandwidth of the port, which is 100M.
TC
TC3 (SP)
TC2 (WRR 16)
TC1 (WRR 8)
TC0 (WRR 4)
1)
Examples assume that frames in different TCs have the same size (to make bandwidth calculation
easier).
5.3.4.3.4 - Bandwidth computation examples
Page 5-17
Use Add button to add a new classification. Delete all button will delete all existing classifications.
Existing classifications on the list can be deleted or modified when selected by using the Delete or
Modify button. Modifying an existing classification allows to change the priority or the CIR. If the
other fields have to be modified, the classification must be deleted and recreated.
The list of classification can be sorted using the column headers.
Columns header
List of configured classifications
Classification Control buttons
Page 5-18
Screenshots are taken for a classification in EVPLINE/EVPLAN mode with metering enabled. If
classification is added in EPLINE or EPLAN mode, the SVLAN field will be absent (default to 1). If
metering is disabled, CIR field will be absent. But the classification remains the same.
Hereafter is the list of available classifications and associated parameters. All classification can be
applied to UNI port, except SVLAN classification. SVLAN classification can only be applied to I-NNI
or E-NNI ports (and is the only classification available for these ports mode).
5.3.4.4.2 - Available classification types
The following screenshot is the same window except that the classification is added for EPLAN and
metering is disabled:
CIR value for this service (if

metering is enabled).
Priority assigned to this

classification (Low, Normal,
High, or Very high)
Service associated with this

classification (if mode is
EVPLINE/EVPLAN).
Parameter specific to this type of

classification.
Type of classification used.
The following screenshot show an example of the classification add window (when add button is
clicked) in EVPLINE/EVPLAN with metering enabled:
Port on which the classification
will be applied.
Only one type of classification may be used on a given port. Exception is for the default modes,
which can be used to make default rules for other classification types (see details in the following
chapter).
In advanced mode, be sure to select the desired tab (EPLAN or EVPLINE/EVPLAN) before adding
a classification. Classifications displayed are only the one relevant for the currently selected tab.
Port classification
CVLAN Id classification
Page 5-19
In this classification mode, it is possible to use a special priority level, called "user". With this "user"
priority selected, the behavior will be a little different. UP (User Priority) field of ingress CVLAN tag
will be copied to the SP (Service Priority) of added SVLAN tag. The PCP decoding table (see
chapter 5.3.4.4.4 - ) will be used to classify frames. If PCP table have drop precedence information
and metering is enabled, the drop precedence will also be extracted from UP field. Otherwise, if
metering is enabled, a CIR value must be defined for the classification.
This classification is based on the VLAN Id field of ingress frames containing a CVLAN tag. The
CVLAN tag of ingress frames must have an EtherType value of 0x8100. An additional VLAN Id
value must be supplied. The value can be a single value or a range of value. Note that when
defining a range of value, more than one service slot might be used on the total number available. It
is possible to add another VLAN Id classification or a default classification (default_all,
default_tagged, default_untagged) on the same port.
In this example, any frame that ingress from port 1 will be added to SVLAN 200 (a tag will be
pushed on top of the frame) and will be classified on Normal priority queue (TC1). The CIR limit
here is 10M.
Port classification.
Target port.
Port classification includes all frames that ingress from a given port. All traffic will fall under this
classification. No additional parameter is required. No other classification may be added to the port.
Default equipment configuration is in 4 EPLINE mode, with a port classification on each GE port
with priority High and metering disabled.
Page 5-20
VLAN Id parameter.
CVLAN Id classification.
CVLAN UP classification
This classification is based on the VLAN UP (User Priority) field of ingress frames containing a
CVLAN tag. The CVLAN tag of ingress frames must have an EtherType value of 0x8100. An
additional UP value must be supplied. It is possible to add another CVLAN UP classification or a
default classification (default_all, default_tagged, default_untagged) on the same port.
In this example, frame with a CVLAN tag (EtherType 0x8100) with a VLAN Id field equal to 10 that
ingress from port 1 will be added to SVLAN 200 (a tag will be pushed on top of the frame) and will
be classified according to UP value of ingress CVLAN tag. The SP field of SVLAN tag will be copied
from UP field of CVLAN tag.
In this example, frame with a CVLAN tag (EtherType 0x8100) with a VLAN Id field equal to 10 that
ingress from port 1 will be added to SVLAN 200 (a tag will be pushed on top of the frame) and will
be classified on Normal priority queue (TC1). The CIR limit here is 10M. All other frames will be
dropped, if there is no other classification on this port.
User predefined classification
Default classifications
Default_all:
Page 5-21
The default classifications allow completing some other classifications with default rules. Other
classifications are done in priority, which ensure that only the unclassified frames fall in the default
mode. Three default modes may be available (depending on the port other classification, see other
classification description for availability):
In this example, frame which match the filter defined for user create rule named "DSCP_10" will be
added to SVLAN 200 (a tag will be pushed on top of the frame) and will be classified on Normal
priority queue (TC1). The CIR limit here is 10M. All other frames will be dropped, if there is no other
classification on this port.
Selected User predefined.
User predefined classification.
The user predefined classifications are configured on a separate window (see chapter 5.3.4.4.3 for details). Here, any of the user predefined classification can be selected. It is possible to add
another User predefined classification (but only of the same type) or a default classification
(default_all) on the same port.
VLAN UP parameter.
CVLAN UP classification.
Page 5-22
Below is a screenshot of the QOS and Services configuration window with some services defined:
Default_tagged and default_untagged can be used together if available. But default_all can't be
used along with default_tagged nor default_untagged.
This classification takes all frames that are not CVLAN tag with an EtherType of 0x8100, and
unclassified.
Default_untagged:
This classification takes all CVLAN tagged frames that are unclassified. CVLAN tag must have
an EtherType of 0x8100.
Default_tagged:
This classification takes all unclassified frames.
5.3.4.4.3 - User predefined classifications
Below is a screenshot of the window:
Configuration->Gigabit Ethernet->Advanced configuration->User predefined->local/remote
Page 5-23
User predefined classification provides 8 additional classifications that can be chosen and
configured according to customer necessity. User predefined configuration window can be found
here:
Page 5-24
Source port: UDP/TCP source port
Same behavior and configuration than SIP but with destination address.
Dest IP: destination IP address
Here all IP source addresses starting with bytes 192 followed by 168 will match the
defined classification.
192.168.**.**
A mask on IP address must be entered. For each byte of the address, a value can be
entered or a wildcard can be used (enter two wildcards), address bytes are separated with
dots:
Source IP: Source IP address
Any value from 0 to 255 might be entered. This value will be compared to the byte of IP
header specifying used upper protocol (for example ICMP, TCP, IGMP, OSPF ..).
IP protocol: IP protocol field of IP header
Any value from 0 to 63 might be entered. This value will be compared to the 6 bits of
DSCP field of IP header (if any) of ingress frames. Combined with default classification
mode, this allows creating up to 8 DSCP based classes of service.
DSCP: DSCP field of IP header
Same behavior and configuration than MAC SA but with destination address.
MAC DA: Ethernet MAC destination address
Here all Ethernet MAC source addresses starting with byte 00 and ending with bytes 12
followed by AB will match the defined classification.
00-**-**-**-12-AB
A mask on MAC address must be entered. For each byte of the address, a value can be
entered or a wildcard can be used (enter two wildcards), address bytes are separated with
dashes:
MAC SA: Ethernet MAC source address
Each of the filters can be modified. For each filter, a name, a target field, and a value should be
provided. The name is used in the QOS and Services configuration window to identify the user
predefined classification. The target field can be any of the following frame field with the associated
values:
Same behavior and configuration than Source port by with destination port.
Dest port : UDP/TCP destination port
In this case, the UP bits of ingress CVLAN tagged frames are copied to SP bits of SVLAN
tag (see chapter 5.3.4.4.2 - for details). The table is then used like in the previous I-NNI
use case, to decode SP bits and extract the target priority and drop precedence if any.
UNI ports, in EVPLINE/EVPLAN, with CVLAN Id classification and "user" priority selected
(decode table)
To decode the SVLAN UP field of ingress frames and obtain the priority to apply and the
drop precedence (metering result, if used).
I-NNI ports, in EVPLINE/EVPLAN (decode table)
To define the value of the UP field of added SVLAN tag, based on the classification
selected priority and drop precedence (resulting from metering if used).
UNI ports, in EVPLINE/EVPLAN (encode table)
Priority assignments are as follows:

Page 5-25
Metering result information doesn't influence SP field value and no drop precedence information can
be extracted from the table. For I-NNI ports classifications, if metering is enabled, the CIR value has
to be defined for the equipment to measure the ingress rate and determine the drop precedence to
apply internally.
The 8P0D table doesn't include drop precedence information (0D) and allows up to 8 priority levels.
Since the equipment has 4 TCs, priorities are grouped two by two.
8P0D table:
Three tables are available, 8P0D, 5P3D, and User. The User selection allows defining the table
manually by clicking on the "Table" button.
The desired PCP table can be selected in the upper part of the QOS and Services configuration
window, in advanced mode.
It will be used in the following situations:
PCP encoding and decoding tables are used to handle the priority field of SVLAN tags (SP) used as
PCP code.
5.3.4.4.4 - PCP encoding
Note: it is not possible to modify an entry if a classification is using this entry (in the QOS and
Services configuration window).
Any value from 0 to 65535 might be entered. This value will be compared to the source
port of UDP or TCP protocol.
Page 5-26
Priority
Low
Low
Medium
Medium
High
High
Very high
Very high
Priority
Low
Medium
High
Very high
8P0D encoding
SP field
1
3
5
7
Drop precedence
yes
no
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
5P3D encoding
Priority
Drop precedence
Low
yes
Low
no
Medium
yes
Medium
no
High
yes
High
no
Very high
yes (not used)
Very high
no
SP field
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
In this mode, the user may configure the PCP table manually. When clicking on the "Table" button
of the QOS and Services window, the following window appears:
User defined table:
Note: encoding for very high priority and drop precedence is unused because frame with drop
precedence on Strict priority queue are systematically dropped, and thus don't egress the
equipment.
5P3D decoding
SP field Priority
Low
0
Low
1
Medium
2
Medium
3
High
4
High
5
Very high
6
Very high
7
Priority assignments are as follows:
If metering is enabled, decoding table will give the drop precedence to use for I-NNI ports. Encoding
table allows encoding the priority selected, and the result of the metering.
The 5P3D table includes up to 5 levels of priority and 3 levels of drop precedence. Since the
equipment has 4 TCs, the two higher priorities are grouped (6 and7). For each other priority two
values are available, one with drop precedence, and one without drop precedence.
5P3D table:
8P0D decoding
SP field
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Page 5-27
Configuration->Gigabit Ethernet->Advanced configuration->Congestion configuration->local/remote
Flow control configuration can be found in the following Pilot menu:
Flow control can be enabled to avoid having congestion inside the equipment. Flow control function
monitors egress queues and above a threshold starts sending pause frames to stop queuing
frames. Equipments connected to GE ports receive the pause frames and stop sending traffic.
Traffic is resumed when queues are empty enough.
5.3.5.1 - Flow control
5.3.5 - Other features
For example, in the previous screenshot, the decoded priority for SP field value 5 is Very high. The
SP field encoded value for priority Normal is 3.
Page 5-28
Clicking on the Add button brings the following window, where it is possible to enter a new address
and select target ports. Address can be either source address (SA) or destination address (DA).
Configuration->Gigabit Ethernet->Advanced configuration->Security configuration->MAC filtering>local/remote
For decoding, the priority is deduced from the table directly.
For encoding, the lowest SP field value corresponding to the destination priority is used.
Mac filtering can be found in the following menu of the Pilot software:
MAC filtering option allows filtering (dropping) some selected addresses. It is possible to filter up to
16 addresses per port. When a new filter is applied, it is possible to apply it to more than one port at
a time.
5.3.5.2 - Mac filtering
It is mandatory for flow control to work that Client equipments connected to GE port are fow
control capable and that the flow control option is turned on for these equipments (generally
found in the port configuration or QOS configuration). It is recommended that all equipments
have flow control enable if one of them is.
In EVPLINE/EVPLAN mode, pause frame is sent only to the ports that share at least one common
SVLAN with the port on which congestion occurs.
Flow control will only send pause frames for local GE ports. For example if congestion occurs on the
Radio port, pause frames will be sent to all GE port (from 1 to 4). If congestion occurs on GE port 3,
pause frames will be sent to GE port 1, 2 and 4.
Flow control can't be enabled if metering is enabled at the same time. Metering must first be
disabled before enabling flow control.
This table is used both for encoding and decoding. For each SP field value, a corresponding priority
can be selected (Low, Medium, High, Very high).
The table can be flushed at anytime using the "Flush FDB" button.
Page 5-29
The aging time of the FDB can be configured by steps of 10 seconds. Default value is 30, which
gives an aging time of 5 minutes.
Configuration->Gigabit Ethernet->Advanced configuration->FDB management->local/remote
Equipment's switch FDB (Forward DataBase can store up to 16k Ethernet MAC addresses. The
FDB configuration window can be found in the following menu of Pilot software:
5.3.5.4 - FDB management
Where network protection protocol such as RSTP would have to wait for generally 3 Hellotime
message timeout before stating that link is unavailable (by default around 6 seconds), the link down
applied by fast link shutdown mechanism force the link unavailability directly, and reduce this delay
to 50ms.
When the equipment radio modem reception gets unlocked (very bad radio conditions or hardware
failure), the equipment will force a link down on the selected ports. The link down is applied in less
than 50ms. When radio condition gets better or hardware failure is fixed, ports are enabled again
and resume normal behavior.
Function can enabled or disabled. If enabled, the target ports must be selected.
Configuration->Gigabit Ethernet->Advanced configuration->Fast link shutdown->local/remote
Fast link shutdown configuration can be found in the following menu of Pilot software:
Fast link shutdown function allows forcing a link shutdown on GE ports when radio channel is
unavailable. This behavior can be useful to speed up network protection protocol triggering like for
example RSTP.
5.3.5.3 - Fast link shutdown
Page 5-30
It is possible to define a minimum profile for Ethernet part of the equipment. To do so, go to the
capacity configuration window, and select the "GE Tx mute on profile below", As show in the
following screenshot.
The dynamic bandwidth should be taken into consideration to defined QOS configuration (in
particular SPTC shaping and metering).
When equipment is in ACM mode, the modulation and coding gain of the radio channel is
dynamically adapted to available radio signal quality. For Ethernet part, the consequence is that the
bandwidth available on Radio port will vary in time to adapt to the current radio configuration. For
each ACM profile, an Ethernet bandwidth is available (see chapter 1.5 - for explanations about
ACM).
5.3.5.6 - Ethernet with ACM
To compute available bandwidth, refer to performance sheets specific to the software version in
use. The bandwidth is given for a single channel, and thus must be summed for 2+0 applications
(taken into account each channel configuration, in particular, the number of E1).
Thus Ethernet bandwidth can be computed at any time as the sum of available bandwidth for
channel 1 and 2 (or H and V in case of XPIC).
When 2+0 radio function is enabled, Ethernet configuration remains the same. No additional
parameter is required. Both radio channels are aggregated using a proprietary patented link
aggregation mechanism. The full radio bandwidth available for Ethernet traffic can always be fully
used, whatever the Ethernet traffic is (LAPC on the contrary rely on MAC addresses and has a
statistical aspect that doesn't guarantee full link exploitation). Moreover, even in dissymmetrical
conditions (when channel 1 has more available bandwidth than channel 2 for example in ACM, or
when on channel is down), the equipment can still guarantee full link exploitation.
5.3.5.5 - Ethernet with 2+0 XPIC or FD modes
Note: Aging time is in fact the aging period. FDB is parsed every aging period to check addresses
that were not used during the period and remove them if needed. From the customer point of view,
an address that stop being used at a time T will be forgotten at a time between T + aging time and T
+ 2 x aging time.
Page 5-31
To give customer more freedom of configuration, no limitation is enforced in embedded or

Pilot software regarding minimum bandwidth, CIR reservation or SPTC shaping. User must
be careful while configuring QOS to avoid oversubscription.
This can be useful to force network protection equipments to select another path in the network
when available bandwidth of radio channel is not sufficient. For example in the screenshot above,
All QOS can be configured as if the minimum bandwidth available for radio channel was 74.4Mbps,
knowing that if equipment goes to a lower bandwidth (or suffer a hardware failure), traffic will be
stopped to force using another path in the network.
Other tributaries (E1, management channel, wayside) are unaffected, and keep functioning
normally.
If at anytime the radio switches to a profile below (strictly) the selected minimum, Ethernt Radio port
available bandwidth will be set to 0. This stops all transmission over the Radio channel for Ethernet.
Select the desired minimum in

the list of available profiles.
Bring the minimum GE profile

selection window.
Page 5-32
I: the access is not used

N: The access is used (Normal)
Blank: active (normal)

S: AIS transmission
Interface: each DB44 or DB78 connector on the front panel includes the access for eight or 16
x 2 Mbit/s inputs/outputs. The electrical interface of the accesses can be configured by the Pilot
one connector at a time by clicking on the corresponding Balanced 120 / Unbalanced 75
buttons.
If the access is used for traffic, it must be configured as normal "N". In this mode, an alarm
is generated if there are no signals on the access.
Service: in normal operation, select "blank" button (active). If "S" is selected, an AIS is returned
locally on the reception access of the channel concerned. Note that, in this case, no AISs are
transmitted to the remote terminal.
If the access is not connected, configure it as invert "I". In this case, no alarm is generated
since there is no signal at the input. However, if the access is configured as invert, a
tributary alarm is generated if a signal is present.
Monitoring:
AIS insert on BER: when this button is ON, an AIS is transmitted when the error rate is higher
than the threshold configured for the alarm BER Alarm".
Balanced 75:
The connector corresponding to
this group of tributaries is in
unbalanced 75 Ohm configuration
Set the loopback

time required
Click on the corresponding button to change the settings.
Blank: No loopback
L: Local loopback
R: Remote loopback
When this button is "ON", an AIS

signal is transmitted when the error
rate is higher than the threshold
configured for the alarm BER Alarm"
This screen may vary depending on the current capacity. A screen example for a capacity of
16 x 2 Mbit/s ports is given below:
Click on one of the "TRIB" connectors in the Shelf view or open the "Configuration / E1
Tributaries / Local or Remote" menu to open the window used to configure the 2 Mbit/s ports.
5.4 - CONFIGURING 2 MBIT/S PORTS
Check one or more

boxes to activate
remote loopback
Remote terminal
Page 5-33
Timer: define the loopback time for the link (maximum 8 hours, default value 1 hour) so that
it returns to non-looped back mode automatically: local timer for Equipment or E1 loopback,
Remote loopback is used to check the radio transmission.
Local loopback is used to check the wiring on the local terminal.
2 Mbit/s Output
2 Mbit/s Input
Remote tributary
loopback
2 Mbit/s Output
2 Mbit/s Input
2 Mbit/s Output
Local terminal
Local tributary
loopback
2 Mbit/s Input
2 Mbit/s Output
2 Mbit/s Input
The principle of remote loopback is explained in the following diagram:
Check one or more

boxes to activate
local loopback
Loopback: click on a button on the loopback line of a port "x" to display the screen allowing
the local or remote E1 loopbacks for this port. This screen can also be displayed from the
"Maintenance / Loopbacks / Tributary x-y" menu. An Equipment loopack (Maintenance /
Loopbacks / Equipment Loopback On menu) will make inaccessible this menu and the E1
ports loopback.
Tributaries loopbacks
Page 5-34
The threshold can be adjusted between -40 dBm and -90 dBm (default: -60 dBm).
Select the Radio tab.
5.5.2 - RSL alarm threshold
For ACM mode, a threshold profile can be selected to trigger modem ACM alarm when modem
current profile goes bellow (strictly) the threshold.
These thresholds may be modified between 10-3 and 10-6. It is advised to keep the default values.
Two BER thresholds can be configured: BER Alarm (default: 10-3) and BER Warning (default: 10-6)
Select the Modem tab.
5.5.1 - BER and ACM alarm thresholds
BER and RSL alarms thresholds can be adjusted with the Pilot software.
Open the "Configuration / Alarms / Local" menu or click on the "Alarms In/Out" connector in the
Shelf view.
5.5 - CONFIGURING THE ALARM THRESHOLDS
When a remote loopback is activated, the orange "Maint" Led on the remote IDU front panel and its
image on the Pilot are lit but no maintenance indication in the Pilot status bar, this one being
connected to the local IDU.
When a local loopback is activated, a maintenance indication is displayed in the Pilot status bar, the
orange "Maint" Led on the local IDU front panel and its image on the Pilot are lit.
remote timer for E1 loopback. This loopback time can be also defined via the "Maintenance
/ Loopbacks / Loopback Timer" menu.
Page 5-35
The threshold can be adjusted by steps of 1 kpbs. Alarm will be raised if Radio port bandwidth goes
below the threshold (useful in ACM). Default value is 0, which disables the alarm.
Select the Gigabit Ethernet tab.
5.5.3 - Ethernet bitrate alarm threshold
Page 5-36
Check the corresponding box "Enable Trap", if you want to send the SNMP trap to network
managers. The default configuration is "box checked" for all alarms except for "Link Status"
and "Rx Frame".
Enter the IP address of

the authorized manager
to be added
Add, modify or delete a

manager
The list of managers authorized to manage the equipment traps can be completed by clicking on
"Trap Managers". The maximum number of authorized managers in a network is 10.
The traps sent to the network manager can be filtered according to the severity: check the
"Disable traps with severity" box corresponding to the severity level you do not want to send the
trap to the manager, for all alarms configured at this level; the default configuration is "box
unchecked".
Define a severity level: "None", "Warning", "Minor", "Major" or "Critical" by checking the
corresponding box.
The default alarm severities are indicated in the tables of 7.5.1 -.
Click on a Relay box to check or uncheck all boxes in the alarm column in one go.
If an alarm is generated the names of the alarm and of the associated relay are written in red.
Relay operation can be enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking the "Enable relays" box in
"General Parameters"; in the default configuration, the box is checked.
3 relay outputs are available on the "Alarms IN/OUT" connector. These relays are fully
programmable: Internal local alarms or external (local or remote) alarms can be assigned to each
relay.
x be assigned to one or more relays if the corresponding boxes are checked; the default
assignment of the relays is given in 5.6.8 -.
On all tabs, each alarm can:
5.6.1 - General parameters
A view of each of the six tabs is given for information or to indicate a special configuration. The
meaning of the alarms is described in 7.5.1 -.
Whenever a box is checked, an "Apply" window is displayed: click to validate the configuration.
Configuration is carried out via the "Configuration / Alarms / Local or Remote" menu, by clicking
on one of the "Relay" Leds on the Pilot front panel, or by clicking on the "Alarms In/Out" connector
on the Shelf view. Six tabs are available to configure the site alarms, their severity, their assignment
to a relay and their transmission to the manager.
5.6 - CONFIGURING THE ALARMS
Page 5-37
This tab can also be used to display or not an alarm regarding the Wayside channel by checking or
unchecking the corresponding box.
If the status of any activated external alarm changes, the "Ext" Led on the IDU front panel is lit red.
SLF-H can also display locally the 5 alarm inputs from the remote terminal by checking the
corresponding box; the "ext" Led of the local IDU will be red.
x "I": the alarm is configured as invert; the alarm state corresponds to open circuit.
x "N": the alarm is configured as normal; there will be no alarms if the corresponding input on the
connector is in open circuit, and an alarm will be generated if this input is shorted to the ground.
x "D": the alarm is disabled
These five alarms can only be configured locally and named; they will be either:
SLF-H can manage up to 5 external alarm inputs available locally. These signals are connected to
the "Alarms IN/OUT" connector. The pinout of this connector is given in 3.7.2.3 -.
5.6.2 - "IDU" tab
Page 5-38
5.6.4 - "Radio" tab
This tab can also be used to set the BER alarm thresholds (see 5.5.1 -).
5.6.3 - "Modem" tab
Page 5-39
- Define RSL Gap, which is the minimal variation of RSL above which the RSL change will be recorder in the
Event log.
- Set the RSL alarm thresholds (see 5.5.2 -).
This tab can also be used to:
Page 5-40
5.6.5 - "Tributaries" tab
5.6.7 - "Fans" tab
- Set the Ethernet bitrate threshold (see 5.5.3 -).
This tab can also be used to:
5.6.6 - "Gigabit Ethernet" tab
Page 5-41
Page 5-42
Alarms assigned by default

Wayside
Modem alarms
Fan alarms
Tributary alarms
Giga Ethernet alarms
Radio alarms
Minimum ATPC transmit power
ATPC reception threshold
Enter the three values and validate with the Apply button.
Page 5-43
ATPC parameters are configured via the Configuration / ATPC / Local or Remote / Channel 1 or
Channel 2 menu or by clicking "ATPC" on the main screen.
To enable ATPC, click on the ATPC button and set it to "ON".
The ATPC process consists in modifying transmit power automatically within the specified range
while ensuring that there are no transmission errors and that the received level on the remote
terminal remains equal to the specified threshold (+/- 1dB).
The ATPC receive threshold must be within the range -40 dBm to -70 dBm.
The minimum and maximum powers must be within the transmitter power ranges.
Maximum ATPC transmit power
ATPC settings depend on the structure of the network (frequency re-use, radio interferers, link
margin). The operator must define 3 main parameters:
ATPC must not be active during antenna installation and commissioning.
ATPC is used to increase the density of a network by allowing frequency reuse. This process
consists in automatically reducing the transmit power of each transmitter, while keeping good
transmission.
5.7 - CONFIGURING THE AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL (ATPC)
Table 5-1 - Default configuration of the alarm relays
Relay 3
Relay 2
Relay 1
Relays
5.6.8 - Default configuration of the alarm relays
Page 5-44
Note that the transmit and receive switches are independent.
When the Revertive Automatic Switching Tx option is not selected, transmit switch position is free.
The system stays in the current position until a fault appears.
Click on the protection button of the Pilot screen or open the "Configuration / Protection / Local or
Remote" menu to display the following screen:
This option gives priority to the transmitter channel 1.

When this box is checked "ON", the transmitter in traffic is that from the ODU 1. If there is a fault on
the channel 1, traffic is switched over onto the channel 2. When the fault on the main channel
disappears, the system switches the traffic back to the channel 1.
Revertive Automatic Switching Tx for "Hot Stand By" or "Space Diversity" configurations.
5.8 - SPECIFIC CONFIGURATIONS FOR 1+1 SYSTEMS
Figure 6.2 - Equipment shelf view with SPDH extension
Figure 6.1 - Equipment shelf view without SPDH extension
in the screen to display the front panel of the equipment managed by the Pilot.
Page 6-1
The Pilot menus, available when logged on as "Super User" mode, are described in the following tree
structure.
This view also provides direct access to several Pilot menus, by clicking on the various elements. For
example, clicking on the "Alarms In/Out" connector opens the equipment alarm configuration window.
Click on
This paragraph describes the Pilot screens used to access all functions of SLF-H equipment.
SLF-H operation and maintenance are carried out:

- directly on the equipment, via the Leds on the front panel,
- from a PC equipped with the Pilot software, or,
- from a network manager by using SNMP protocol.
6. OPERATION PILOT
5BOPERATION PILOT
View
Text Log
Graphical Log
Open Session
Close Session
Figure 6.3 - Pilot menu tree structure
QoS global configuration

QoS and Services configuration
Congestion configuration
Security configuration
User predefined
FDB management
Fast Link Shutdown
Ethernet port configuration

Advanced configuration
Mac filtering
General Ethernet Statistics

Metering Statistics
Page 6-2
Channel 1
Channel 2
Tributary 1-8
Tributary 9-16
Tributary 17-32
Tributary 33-48
Tributary 49-64
Tributary 65-80
Equipment Loopback On
Equipment Loopback Off
Loopback Timer
Shortcuts
About FH HC
Pilot
Tx/Rx Forcing
Loopbacks
Frequency Scan
Constructor Maintenance
Restriction
Try to unmute remote
RSL
Link Statistics
Gigabit Ethernet
Wayside
Clear BER stats
Clear/Reset All
Alarms
Management Network
Gigabit Ethernet
Protection
ATPC
E1 Tributaries
Hardware Inventory
Pilot
Reset to default database
Channel 1
Channel 2
Help
Maintenance
Performance
Configuration
For some configuration, the tree structure items include the "local" or "remote" submenu, which is not displayed here.
Menus in bold have submenus
Ethernet Ports and Radio Channel

Routes
Save
Load
Local
Remote
Alarms
Session
System Report
IDU Configuration
Boot Firmware
IDU Firmwares
ODU Firmwares
Quit
File
5BOPERATION PILOT
"Help / About FH HC Pilot" menu: indicates the Pilot software version
Page 6-3
"Help / Shortcuts" menu: gives the list of functions that can be accessed via keyboard shortcuts.
6.1 - HELP MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-4
This menu can be used to quickly load a previously saved IDU configuration, either in the list proposed
or in an external file retrieved by "Other file"; in this case, click on "Download".
6.2.3 - "File / IDU Configuration / Local or Remote / Load" menu
Warning, configuration filename should not contain special characters (otherwise,

configuration file retrieve will fail).
Note: always use a ".sav" extension for these configuration files.
This menu can be used to save on PC the local or remote site configurations (cards, alarms,
performance, connections, protection, etc.).
If the IDU or the ODU is replaced, these files can be used to reload the configuration quickly.
6.2.2 - "File / IDU Configuration / Local or Remote / Save" menu
This menu can be used to print or save on PC a text file containing various useful information, like for
example equipment configuration data and the detailed equipment composition (serial numbers,
hardware and software versions, etc.) of the local and remote sites. Items can be added or not in the
report depending on the boxes checked (see 4.5.9 -).
6.2.1 - "File / System Report" menu
6.2 - FILE MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Activate reserve firmware: activates the IDU firmware from the reserve bank.
Page 6-5
The menu indicates the current version of the IDU firmware and the version stored in reserve bank.
6.2.5 - "File / IDU Firmware / Local or Remote" menu
Warning, boot filename should not contain special characters (otherwise, boot file download
will fail). It is safer to keep the name of the boot files provided by Sagemcom unmodified.
This menu gives the current version of the boot firmware and can be used to load another firmware
selected in the list proposed or in an external file retrieved by "Other file"; in this case, click on
"Download".
6.2.4 - "File / Boot Firmware / Local or Remote" menu
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-6
The "Open Session" and "Close Session" menus are used to open or close a session concerning a
link without exiting the Pilot.
6.3 - SESSION MENU
"File / Quit" menu: after confirmation, closes the Pilot software.
6.2.7 - "File / Quit" menu
Warning, firmware filename should not contain special characters (otherwise, firmware file
download will fail). It is safer to keep the name of the firmware files provided by Sagemcom
unmodified.
In 1+1 configuration, the standby ODU is downloaded independently.
Download: downloads a firmware version selected in the list proposed or in an external file retrieved
by "Other file"; in this case, click on "Download".
After downloading, the Pilot proposes immediate or deferred activation of the new firmware.
Activate reserve firmware: activates the ODU firmware from the reserve bank.
The menu indicates the current version of the ODU firmware and the version stored in reserve bank.
6.2.6 - "File / ODU Firmware / Local or Remote" menu
Warning, firmware filename should not contain special characters (otherwise, firmware file
download will fail). It is safer to keep the name of the firmware files provided by Sagemcom
unmodified.
Download: downloads a firmware version selected in the list proposed or in an external file retrieved
by "Other file"; in this case, click on "Download".
After downloading, the Pilot proposes immediate or deferred activation of the new firmware.
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-7
The meaning of these alarms, their default severity and the corrective action required are indicated in
7.5.1 -.
Green Led: no alarm

Red Led: alarm (on the shelf view, the corresponding connector will be surrounded in red)
Grey Led: no corresponding physical elements or alarm indication not required or deactivated alarm.
This screen can also be accessed by clicking on one of the alarm Leds on the Pilot front panel or on
icon at the top left of the screen.
the
This menu is used to display all alarms of the local or remote site.
6.4.1 - "Alarms / View / Local or Remote" menu
6.4 - ALARMS MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Event log: date and time when the events occurred, location, event type, additional information.
Page 6-8
Click on "Reset Log" to clear all records on the "Alarms" and "Events" tabs simultaneously and start a
new record.
Click on "Save Log" to save the alarm log or the event log on the PC in a .log file which can be kept
for consultation.
Alarms: date and time when they were triggered, location, severity, alarm type, appearance or
disappearance information.
This menu is used to display two types of record:
6.4.2 - "Alarms / Text Log / Local or Remote" menu
5BOPERATION PILOT
This menu is described in 5.6 -.
6.5 - CONFIGURATION / ALARMS MENU
When the equipment is off, the log is kept in the flash memory.
Page 6-9
Note common to 4.4.2 and 4.4.3: the log information is stored in the IDU flash memory.
The IDU flash memory is limited to 2048 alarm transitions or events. When the log is full, the oldest
alarms or events are overwritten by the most recent.
Click on "Reset Log" to clear all records simultaneously and start a new record.
Zoom in with the mouse wheel if required.
In the top part, check the element for which you want to display a graphical analysis; the alarm
statuses are plotted in red.
This display is the graphical representation of the alarms contained in the equipment log.
6.4.3 - "Alarms /Graphical Log / Local or Remote" menu
Note: event dating is based on the Pilot clock which has been preferably synchronized on the clock of
the PC connected.
5BOPERATION PILOT
Switch
L2
Page 6-10
Static routes and a default gateway can be also be defined for each IDU.
On IDU Ethernet interfaces, the user has to define whether or not to involve RIP or OSPF protocols.
On IDU PPP interfaces, the OSPF protocol is systematically implemented.
To route the datagrams on the various network elements, the routes to reach these elements must be
defined.
A route is defined for an IP network; e.g. 135.11 if the network mask is 255.255.0.0.
The network entities can exchange their routes using the RIP and OSPF protocols.
A SLF-H equipment can be connected via the IDU Ethernet interface to another equipment, whether
or not SLF-H.
This address is called the Management IP Address.

The IDU Ethernet port IP address does not operate with SNMP, since the equipment always answers
with the management address.
To make the terminals easier to identify, a virtual IP address is defined for each terminal (terminal =
IDU+ODU). This address will be used by the Pilot software and the network manager to identify the
terminal. This address is independent of the IDU Ethernet port address and must not belong to the
same subnet.
The radio port (TSL) communicating with the remote IDU via a PPP type protocol. To make the
management system easier to implement, the IP addresses of these ports are managed internally
and are transparent for the user.
TSL/PPP (to remote IDU)
Network
management
interface
The IDU management Ethernet port (MGMT1 or MGMT2), associated with a MAC address.
This MAC address is unique and non modifiable. An IP address is associated with this MAC
address.
Ethernet
The router has two ports:
MGMT2
MGMT1
The equipment can be managed via the integrated network management interface acting as an IP
router.
SLF-H equipment can be operated via an SNMP type management network, by the Pilot software,
and/or an SNMP manager (IONOS NMS).
6.6.1 - Description of the Management network
6.6 - CONFIGURATION / MANAGEMENT NETWORK / ETHERNET PORTS AND RADIO

CHANNEL / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Laptop
Site C
Manager
Ethernet
Site A
- Two hop link
192.168.114.11
192.168.114.12
Eth
Site B
2.0.0.2
Page 6-11
Laptop
TSL
2.0.0.10
TSL
OSPF
Laptop
Site B
10.0.0.10
Eth
Manager
Site A
Manager
10.0.0.1
Ethernet
The manager is connected to the IDU of site A via the Ethernet access. The IDU of site B may be
connected to a laptop for local maintenance.
- One hop link
Network management interface configuration examples
5BOPERATION PILOT
PC
TSL
OSPF
OSPF
192.168.114.13
TSL
192.168.114.12
TSL
Eth
Eth
2.0.0.3
255.255.255.0
2.0.0.2
255.255.255.0
Page 6-12
Port Id: used to display the statuses of the MGMT1, MGMT2 and Wayside ports.
On system initialization, the addresses are entered via the serial interface (VT100). These values can
then be modified via the Pilot or the manager, but in this case, note that if an incorrect value is entered
via a remote terminal, it will be impossible to reach the equipment and intervention on site will be
required to put back the correct address.
The meaning of the configuration parameters is described in the previous paragraph.
6.6.2 - Network configuration
192.168.114.14
10.0.1.1 Eth
Static route 192.168.114.x

/255.255.255.0 => 10.0.1.1
10.0.1.10
255.255.255.0
TSL
192.168.114.11
10.0.0.1 Eth
Static route 192.168.114.x

/255.255.255.0 => 10.0.0.1
Manager
10.0.0.10
255.255.255.0
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-13
This access can be physically disconnected by setting the "Wayside transmission" setting to "Off".
The Wayside is a point to point 10/100BaseT Ethernet channel between the local and remote
equipment.
6.6.3 - Wayside configuration
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-14
There is a maximum of 20 static routes.
Cost: defines the cost of using the route.
If the TSL (PPP) interface is to be used, the Gateway address must be the remote equipment
management address.
If the Ethernet interface is to be used, the Gateway address must be in the Ethernet interface network;
the MAC address of the Gateway will be used to reach it.
The "Gateway" field is the equipment address to which network frames will be sent.
The IP network to be reached is defined by the "Destination Address" and "Subnet Mask" fields.
To add a static route, click on "Add"
This table lists the IP routes known by the equipment.

Direct routes are known due to the configuration of the equipment interfaces.
Indirect routes may result from the routing protocol (OSPF or RIP) or definition of a static route.
6.7 - CONFIGURATION / MANAGEMENT NETWORK /ROUTES / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Select the box corresponding to the new configuration and validate.
If the changeover is refused, there may be a hardware problem or the two ODUs may not be
compatible with the required 1+1 mode (e.g. different ODUs in 1+1 HSB, etc.).
Revertive automatic switching Tx: see 5.8 -.
The various system configurations are described in 3.5 -.
Page 6-15
Note: it is important to have both terminals in the same configuration. Avoid having the two terminals
in different configurations.
Perform these operations on the local and remote equipment.
Click on the protection button of the Pilot screen or open the "Configuration / Protection /
Local or Remote" menu to display the following screen:
Then, to switch from one configuration to the other, use the Pilot software as described below.
- On first installation: with the two Modems inserted in the IDU each Modem being connected its ODU
a cable. Switch on both Modems to power up the terminal.
- On a 1+0 link already established: there is no need to disconnect the link; install Modem2/ODU2
and switch on the second Modem.
There are two ways to establish a 1+1 link:
SLF-H IDU is common to the 1+0 and 1+1 configurations. The hardware difference is that the 1+0 IDU
uses only one Modem while the 1+1 IDU contains two.
6.9 - CONFIGURATION / PROTECTION / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
6.8 - CONFIGURATION / GIGABIT ETHERNET MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-16
This screen gives the equipment hardware inventory (references, serial numbers, components
manufacturing dates) and main ODU features.
6.12 - CONFIGURATION / HARDWARE INVENTORY / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
6.11 - CONFIGURATION /E1 TRIBUTARIES / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
6.10 - CONFIGURATION / ATPC / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Clear: clears the graph and starts a new record.
Page 6-17
This graph displays the ODU minimum and maximum RSLs over time and the number of seconds
during which the high and lower configurable thresholds have been crossed.
6.15 - PERFORMANCE / RSL / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
This menu is used to restore the system factory settings. Only the management network configuration
is kept unmodified, which allows remote configuration of the equipment afterwards.
6.14 - CONFIGURATION / RESET TO DEFAULT DATABASE / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
This menu can be used to display/hide tool tips when pointing the mouse on the various screen
parameters.
6.13 - CONFIGURATION / PILOT MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
(Errored Seconds): number of seconds with at least one error detected within a period of 1 s or
a fault.
Page 6-18
Clear: clears the graph and starts a new display.
UAS (UnAvailable Second): number of unavailable seconds.
SES (Severely Errored Seconds): number of severely errored seconds

An SES is a second during which the number of errors exceeds the threshold defined or during
which at least one fault is detected.
ES
The quality counters are as follows:
Quality counters ES, SES and UAS:
Quality processing is carried out by calculating and determining various states: ES (Errored Second),
SES (Severely Errored Second) and UAS (UnAvailable Second).
This graph displays the link performance log for measurement periods of 1 min, 15 min or 24h, either
in number of seconds or as a percentage of the period.
6.16 - PERFORMANCE / LINK STATISTICS / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-19
Reset counters: resets the counters and starts a new count.

Refresh: allows you to update counter values. (Refresh is done automatically every few seconds).
This menu displays the statistics counters of the Ethernet ports.
6.17 PERFORMANCE / GIGABIT ETHERNET / GENERAL ETHERNET STATISTICS /

LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-20
This menu is used to display the number of bytes transmitted and received on the Wayside Ethernet
port.
6.19 - PERFORMANCE / WAYSIDE / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
Refresh: allows you to update counter values. (Refresh is done automatically every few seconds).
Reset: resets the counters and starts a new count.
To view counter for a probe, select the corresponding classification in the list, the probe
information are then displayed in the bottom part of the window.
To enable/disable a probe, select the target classification in the list displayed on the top of the
window, and click on the "enable"/"disable button". A counter displays the total number of
enabled probes.
A total of 16 probes are available. For each classification or service, a probe can be activated or not.
The configuration window displays a summary of configured classifications, and allow probe
configuration.
The IDU board supplies counters indicating the quantity of valid (green) and unvalid (yellow) traffic
received for each Classification (or service).
6.18 - PERFORMANCE / GIGABIT ETHERNET / METERING STATISTICS / LOCAL OR

REMOTE MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
This menu resets the local or remote BER counters and starts new counts.
6.20 - PERFORMANCE / CLEAR BER STATS / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
Reset counters: resets the counters and starts a new count.

Refresh: allows you to update counter values. (Refresh is not done automatically).
Page 6-21
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-22
The main Pilot screen indicates the active transmitter and master.
To perform manual switching commands (forcing), click on the box corresponding to the transmitter,
receiver or master to be activated and validate with OK.
In manual mode, the equipment is in maintenance mode (maintenance indication at the bottom of the
Pilot screen, orange Led "Maint" on the Pilot screen and orange Led lit on the IDU front panel).
The "Tx 1/2", "Rx 1/2", "Mst 1/2" forcings are used for maintenance actions.
In normal position "Tx Auto", "Rx Auto", "Mst Auto", switching is carried out automatically.
Transmit and Receive switches are independent. A system can work with ODU (1) transmitting, and
ODU (2) receiving.
Only active for 1+1 links, this menu can be used to perform manual transmit or receive switching. It is
also possible to click on "Tx" in the main screen.
6.22 - MAINTENANCE / TX/RX FORCING MENU
This menu resets all the local and remote counters: "RSL" performances, "link statistics"
performances, "GigaEthernet" performances, "Wayside" performances, BER indicators; it also clears
the alarms and events logs. New counts start.
6.21 - PERFORMANCE / CLEAR/RESET ALL
5BOPERATION PILOT
Equipment Loopback Off: can set the time after which the closures will be automatically
deleted.
Equipment timer: remove all Equipment loopback.
Clicking on the "Frequency scan" menu displays the following window:
Page 6-23
The process is carried out separately on each terminal. The user defines the frequencies to scan. The
local transmitter is muted, while the receiver measures the Receive Signal Levels for each frequency.
This menu is used to carry out a frequency scan around the receive frequency, in order to identify
possible radio interferers.
The measurements results are displayed graphically and stored in memory for future consultation.
6.24 - MAINTENANCE / FREQUENCY SCAN / CHANNEL 1 OR CHANNEL 2 MENU
Equipment Loopback On: active a local Equipment loopback provided that there is no
loopback on E1 ports. An Equipment loopback (IDU card) operates in the same way as a
tributaries loopback, except that they are carried out on the resulting frame. This loopback is
used to test Equipment operation.
This menu is used to make loopbacks on the 2 Mbit/s channels (see 5.4 -) or on the resulting signal.
6.23 - MAINTENANCE / LOOPBACKS MENU
The active transmitters and masters are shown in bold.

Forced configurations appear in red and trigger the maintenance display.
5BOPERATION PILOT
7MHz
* = not available in ACM mode
Radio channel
14MHz
28MHz
56MHz
Page 6-24
See Table 4-2 and Table 4-2 for the list of the accessible configurations in each license.
4 licenses are available for the modulation/bandwidth available. An additional license allows using
ACM feature. In ACM, the limitation for available modulation restricts the maximum configurable
profile.
70Mbps License
150Mbps License
300Mbps License
400Mbps License
Modulation
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
This menu is used to extend the flow transmitted by SLF-H. Indeed, according to the need, the
equipment can be ordered with the following options:
6.26 - MAINTENANCE / RESTRICTION / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
The bar at the bottom of the Pilot screen can be used to access this menu.
This menu is not permanent; it is displayed when the radio link has been lost (no received signal) and
local transmit part suffer no critical issues. Clicking on this menu entry will try to remove mute on
remote equipment (if any), provided the remote equipment has a correct matching radio configuration
(frequencies, bandwidth, modulation, number of E1, link id).
6.25 - MAINTENANCE / TRY TO UNMUTE REMOTE / LOCAL OR REMOTE MENU
5BOPERATION PILOT
Page 6-25
Note: the keyword "none" displayed next to a restriction entry state that there is no restriction (so
everything is available up to the capacity of the hardware).
The bottom part of the window contains a textbox that can be copied for easy request of new licenses.
When using the Expansion chassis MUX64 SPDH, the number of available E1 tributaries can be
extended also. The total number of E1 can be 32, 48, 64 or 80.
To extend the number of E1 a license must be bought. A software code provided by Sagemcom
allows updating the terminal. A code based on the MUX64 SPDH serial number must be entered.
Please note that in 1+1 configuration, the lower Modem configuration is taken into account to enforce
the limitation.
It is possible to upgrade to a higher capacity or enabled ACM by purchasing a new license. A software
code supplied by Sagemcom is used to update the terminal. A code depending on the Modem serial
number must be entered Modem by Modem (2 codes for a 1+1 configuration).
A window indicates the current maximum configuration for each Modem (modulation / radio
bandwidth).
5BOPERATION PILOT
Visual inspection
Description of front panel alarm Led operation
Troubleshooting procedure
Alarms managed by the Pilot
Typical screens in case of problem
Replacing an ODU
Replacing a Modem
Replacing an IDU
Laptop with serial port

Pilot software
Gigabit Ethernet tester
2 Mbit/s transmission analyzer (optional)
Digital multimeter
Nominal value (installation data)
Within specified range
Tight mount
Receive Signal Level (Pilot)
Power supply voltage
Antenna mounting
No red Leds lit
Alarms (front panel and Pilot)
lightning
Dust, humidity,
damage
in Clean or repair
Actions
Mount antenna correctly
Replace power supply
Page 7-1
Realign antenna, check remote

terminal transmit power
If some alarms are red, use this

troubleshooting guide ( 0 and 7.5
-)
Clean the fans regularly
strike Clean or replace
moisture
IDU, ODU and MUX64 SPDH shelf
circuits,
Cuts, short
connectors
Look for
IDU / ODU coaxial cable
Visual inspection
Before starting the operation, it is important to perform a visual inspection of the terminal and its
installation.
7.2 - VISUAL INSPECTION
x
x
x
x
x
Measurement equipment required
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Main points discussed
This paragraph helps you solve problems using the information available (front panel Leds and Pilot
software) and describes the procedures for replacing defective units.
7.1 - INTRODUCTION
7. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Page 7-2
GbE Lnk/Act
1 2 3 4
POWER
FAN
Figure 7.1 - IDU front panel Leds
ext
trib
Maint
idu
The Leds on the IDU Front panel and the Modem are shown below:
7.4 - DESCRIPTION OF IDU FRONT PANEL LEDS
Some typical problems are described in 7.6 -.
Once the problem has been isolated, it is important to understand its cause and to apply corrective
actions to avoid reoccurrence of the problem.
7.3.3 - Fix the problem
Once the symptom has been defined, the faulty unit can be isolated using information supplied by the
Leds on the IDU front panel and the information available on the Pilot.
SLF-H replacement units are the ODU, the IDU (without Modem and without FAN), the Modem, the
FAN drawer, the MUX64 SPDH shelf.
A 1+0 link is composed of several units. The goal of this step is to determine what the most probable
unit to replace is.
The difficulty is that, in some cases, the problem may be generated by the remote terminal, external
equipments (power supplies, bad interface signal levels, etc.) or the external environment (path
obstruction, radio interferers, severe climatic conditions, etc.).
7.3.2 - Isolate the problem
This is generally made by the field technician: common symptoms are "the link is broken", "there are
excessive transmission errors", "there are alarms", etc.
These symptoms may be permanent (failure) or intermittent. The alarm and event data and the
graphic records available in the Pilot can generally be used to improve the diagnostic ( 6.4 -).
7.3.1 - Describe the symptom
The goal is to make a precise diagnostic of the problem, in order to determine the faulty unit quickly
and replace it.
7.3 - TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
6BTROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
EM
OD
M
U
OD
RS
L
"ext" Led is red if there is a status change on one of the external alarms which have been
associated with this Led (see 5.6 - for a description of this alarm).
"GbE Lnk/Act" Leds 1 to 4 are dedicated to the Gigabit Ethernet transmission
The "FAN" Led is red if the FAN module or one of the fans is faulty.
The "RSL" Led is red if the level received by the ODU is below the programmed threshold, or if
there is a BER alarm (BER alarm, or BER warning). In most cases, this alarm corresponds to a
propagation or radio interferer problem.
The "ODU" Led is red if there is an ODU alarm or if an ODU is not connected (cable problem).
The Led is also red if the ODU is muted on a 1+0 link or if the two ODU of a 1+1 link are muted.
The "POWER" Led is green when the Modem is powered up.
Page 7-3
If an E1 extension MUX64 SPDH shelf is connected with the IDU and powered up, the "PWR"
Led of this shelf is green after startup of the IDU.
7.4.3 - Leds of the MUX64 SPDH shelf
The "MODEM" Led is red if there is a problem on the ODU cable, if the modulator, demodulator
or power supply is faulty, or if the link is down (no received data).
7.4.2 - Modem Leds
"trib" Led is red if there is no input signal on a tributary configured as normal, or if there is an
input signal on a tributary configured as inverted.
Led off: link down

Green Led lit permanently: link up
Green Led flashing: traffic indicator, flashes for each GE frame
Orange Led lit: collision
"idu" Led is red when there is multiplexer or a demultiplexer failure, when receive data is not
recovered (link broken), or if there is no fan drawer installed.
"maint" Led is orange during a maintenance operation (remote loopback, manual control of 1+1
switching). It is off in normal mode.
7.4.1 - IDU Leds
Figure 7.2 - Alarms screen on the Pilot
icon at the top left of the screen to access the local alarm display window.
Page 7-4
The meaning of these alarms, their default severity and the corrective action required are indicated in
the following tables.
Green Led: no alarm

Red Led: alarm (on the shelf view, the corresponding connector will be surrounded in red)
Grey Led: no corresponding physical elements or alarm indication not required
Click on the
This screen can also be accessed by clicking on one of the alarm Leds on the main Pilot screen.
Click on the "Alarms / View / Local or Remote" menu to access the alarm summary screen. The
active alarms are red.
7.5.1 - Alarm summary screen
The Pilot software provides more details than the Leds on the front panel of the equipment.
7.5 - ALARMS MANAGED BY THE PILOT
IDU alarms
Description
None
Leds on the
equipment
Major
Corrective actions
Corrective actions
Check power supply of SPDH equipment. Check the

cable between IDU and SPDH equipments. If alarm is still
present, power down the SPDH and IDU, and apply
power to SPDH and then IDU. If alarm is still present,
replace SDPH equipment
Corrective actions
Examine the various alarms on the 2 terminals of the link

to improve the diagnostic
Examine the various alarms on the 2 terminals of the link

to improve the diagnostic
Check that the remote terminal has the same Link ID. If
the Link IDs of the 2 terminals do not match, they are
displayed in red on the main Pilot screen; if identical they
are displayed in black. If the alarm remains, another link
operating at the same frequency may be disturbing the
link.
Check cable
Page 7-5
Default alarm
severity
Table 7-3 - Meaning of the SPDH alarm
SPDH equipment is not responding to Depends on alarm

IDU board.
origin
Description
SPDH state
SPDH alarms
Major
Indicates that the INT demultiplexer is Depends on alarm

unlocked
origin
Rx Frame
Table 7-2 - Meaning of radio alarms
Major
This alarm indicates that the dialog is

Depends on alarm
interrupted between local and remote
origin
equipment
Minor
Default alarm
severity
Link Status
IDU
Leds on the
equipment
Table 7-1 - Meaning of the Wayside alarm
Default alarm
severity
Leds on the
equipment
Wayside port Led

( 3.7.2.4 -)
This alarm is present if local and remote

ID Codes do not match. The receive data
is replaced by an AIS.
Description
No input signal
Link ID
Radio link
alarms
Wayside
Page 7-6
This alarm is triggered when the

temperature of the Modem 1 is greater
than the maximum permitted value
This alarm is triggered when the
temperature of the Modem 2 (1+1
configuration) is greater than the
maximum permitted value
Modem 1
Temperature
Modem 2
Temperature
FAN
FAN
FAN
idu (absence)
FAN
Leds on the
equipment
Major
Major
Major
Major
Default alarm
severity
Corrective actions
Look for the possible alarm causes: IDU or Modem 2

faulty or room temperature too hot.
Look for the possible alarm causes: IDU or Modem 1

faulty or room temperature too hot.
Look for the possible alarm causes: IDU faulty or room

temperature too hot.
Replace faulty or missing unit.
Table 7-4 - Meaning of Fan and Temperature alarms
This alarm is triggered when the IDU

temperature is greater than the
maximum permitted value
This alarms is triggered if there a fan or

FAN module fault or if there is no fan
drawer
Description
IDU
Temperature
Fans
Fan /
temperature
alarms
MODEM
MODEM, RSL
MODEM, RSL
MODEM
MODEM
This alarm is generated if there is

modulator fault. When a modulation
alarm occurs, the transmitter is
automatically muted.
This alarm is generated when BER is

greater than the programmed threshold
(default 10-3). A BER alarm can be
generated by a poor receive level, a
Modem fault or radio interference
This warning is generated when BER is

greater than the programmed threshold
(default 10-6).
Power supply alarm returned by the

Modem. This alarm indicates a Modem
power supply fault or input voltage too
low at the IDU input.
Current modulation profile is below the

configured threshold.
Modulation
BER alarm
BER warning
Power supply
ACM
Modulation
MODEM
This alarm is generated if there is a

demodulator fault or if received data is
not recovered
Demodulation
Minor
Major
Minor
Major
Major
Major
Corrective actions
Check power supply voltage -48 V at the IDU input:

the measured value must be included between -39V and
-59V.
If alarm remains present, change the Modem.
Check the configured threshold for this alarm. Check
radio conditions.
Check other parameters such as the RSL, remote

terminal alarms and possible propagation problems.
Check other parameters such as the RSL, remote

terminal alarms and possible propagation problems.
Replace the Modem
Check all alarms on both terminals to find the cause of

the problem, as well as possible propagation problems.
Page 7-7
Default alarm
severity
Table 7-5 - Meaning of Modem alarms
Leds on the
equipment
Description
Modem alarms
Page 7-8
Description
ODU
A transmit power alarm is generated in

case of a transmitter AGC loop fault, or
in case of a transmitter mute set by the
operator (in 1+1 system when both
transmitters of a terminal are in mute
position).
Tx Power alarm present
Tx Power
Mute
Minor
Minor
Minor
Major
Minor
Minor
Minor
Default alarm
severity
Corrective actions
If the transmitter was not muted intentionally and the fault

remains, replace the ODU
Replace the ODU
Replace the ODU
Replace the ODU
Replace the Modem or the ODU.
Check IDU / ODU cable losses.
Check power supply voltage (-48 V) and cable losses. If

the power supply voltage and the cable are OK, replace
the ODU
Use the indications on the remote terminal such as RSL

and alarms to make a diagnostic.
Table 7-6 - Meaning of ODU alarms
ODU
ODU
This alarm is generated in case of

receive synthesizer fault.
Rx Frequency
ODU
ODU
This alarm is generated in case of

transmit synthesizer fault. This alarm
automatically mutes the transmitter.
Cable alarm returned by the ODU. This

alarm is generated if the transmit IF level
at ODU input is outside the limits. This
alarm causes the transmitter is
automatically switched off (Mute).
Cable
ODU
RSL
Leds on the
equipment
Tx Frequency
Power supply alarm returned by the

ODU. This alarm indicates an ODU
power supply fault or input voltage too
low
Power supply
RSL (Receive This alarm is generated when the RSL is

below the programmed threshold (default
Signal Level)
threshold: -60 dBm). It may also be
generated in case of a power problem on
a remote transmitter, a propagation
problem, or a faulty receiver.
ODU alarms
trib
Major
Default alarm
severity
Corrective actions
Check tributary alarm configuration, cable continuity and

presence of signal at output of equipment connected to
SLF-H.
Corrective actions
Check the alarm configured threshold. Check radio

conditions.
Check radio conditions. Minimum profile can be reduced.
Make sure that the Ethernet link cable (fiber or RJ45) is

not faulty. Also check the SFP module.
Check Ethernet cable (fiber or RJ45) and connected

equipment configuration
Insert the correct module or change the configuration

(Gbe Lnk/Act equipment might be on in this case)
Plug in the module correctly or replace it of faulty
Page 7-9
Table 7-8 - Meaning of E1 Tributary alarms
Leds on the
equipment
Description
This alarm is generated when there is no

input signal for a tributary configured as
normal (N), or when there is an input
signal for a tributary configured as
inverted (I).
Trib Alarm
E1 tributary
alarms
Minor
Minor
Major
Major
Major
Major
Default alarm
severity
Table 7-7 - Meaning of Gigabit Ethernet alarms
None
In ACM mode, current available

bandwidth for the Ethernet radio port is
below the configured threshold
Ge Bitrate
Gbe Lnk/Act off
SFP Tx Default Ethernet link assembly fault (e.g. auto

nego FAIL, cannot transmit in Tx)
None
Gbe Lnk/Act off
Loss of input signal or auto negotiation

failed
SFP LOS
In ACM mode, current profile is below

configured minimum for Ethernet radio
port
Gbe Lnk/Act off
The SFP module inserted do not match

with the expected configured type
Tx Mute
Gbe Lnk/Act off
Module absent
Leds on the
equipment
SFP Type
Mismatch
Description
SFP Presence
Gigabit
Ethernet
alarms
Description
Page 7-10
Remote
External
Alarms
ext
ext
Leds on the
equipment
Major
Major
Default alarm
severity
Corrective actions
Check generating event: e.g. door open, etc.
Check generating event: e.g. door open, etc.
Table 7-9 - Meaning of External alarms
External
alarms
(remote
terminal
incoming loops), alarms concerning the 5
remote external alarm inputs configured
(see 5.6.2 -)
External alarms (local terminal incoming

Local External loops), alarms concerning the 5 local
external alarm inputs configured (see
Alarms
5.6.2 -)
External
alarms
Indirect alarms caused by a fault on another unit or by an external problem to determine the
cause of an indirect alarm, analyze all possible causes of the alarm and select the most likely.
Page 7-11
If the connection between PC and IDU breaks during a Pilot session, the Pilot displays the following
screen:
7.6.2 - No local equipment, no remote equipment
The Pilot cannot communicate with the IDU. Check the Ethernet cable between IDU and PC and check
that the IP addresses and subnet masks of the PC and the IDU are compatible. From the PC, ping the
IDU Ethernet address. If the ping result is negative, change the IP address of the PC or of the IDU
Ethernet port (see 4.2 -).
When connecting the IDU to the PC, the following screen may be displayed:
7.6.1 - No IDU-Pilot software communication
The following screens are representative of some typical problems.
7.6 - TYPICAL SLF-H PILOT SCREENS IN CASE OF PROBLEM
In some cases with transient faults, it may be worthwhile examining the graphic log available and the
alarm or event data to determine the cause of the fault ( 6.4 -).
7.5.3 - Event log
Direct alarms which occur when there is a fault on a unit (e.g. transmit frequency alarm).
There are two types of alarm in a microwave radio link:
7.5.2 - Direct and indirect alarms
Page 7-12
In the bottom bar, the software suggests trying to "unmute" the remote equipment, which could be one
of the reasons why it fails to operate. Go to the maintenance menu to access this command.
Check the remote terminal configuration (frequency, capacity, modulation, transmit power), correct
antenna alignment and possible presence of obstacles between the two antennas.
The local terminal operates correctly but communication with the remote terminal is down. In this case,
the typical Pilot screen is as follows:
7.6.4 - No remote radio
Check the cable between IDU and ODU. If the problem remains, replace the ODU or the Modem.
The IDU is recognized by the Pilot, but the ODU does not operate: absent, faulty or not answering the
IDU requests. In this case, the typical Pilot screen is as follows:
7.6.3 - No local radio
Check that that the IDU is powered correctly and that the Ethernet cable between the PC and the IDU is
correctly installed. Try to ping equipments all along the network path to reach IDU.
Page 7-13
Increase the transmit power if possible. If the problem remains, replace the ODU on the site with the
doubtful transmitter.
The RSL of one of the two terminals is too low with respect to the other terminal. In this case, the typical
Pilot screen is as follows:
7.6.6 - Low transmit power
Check antenna alignment, transmit power levels and make sure that the fault is not due to a temporary
propagation problem.
The link is established but the RSL is low. The typical Pilot screen is as follows:
7.6.5 - Low RSL
Page 7-14
Remark: it is not necessary to cut off the power supply of the IDU (switch Modem off) to carry out this
operation.
Note: for a 1+1 system, an ODU can be replaced with the second one operating. Before replacing an ODU,
select manual switching Tx and Rx on the transmitter and the receiver, which continue to operate (see
6.22 -). It is useless to force the Master channel (leave master channel configured to automatic).
Once the change has been done, return to automatic switching.
1- Disconnect the IDU/ODU cable at IDU Modem output.

2- Before removing the ODU, note the position of the arrow on the ODU cover, disconnect cable.
3- Replace the ODU with another one of the same type according to the installation procedure ( 3.5 -),
respecting the polarization (arrow in the same position as before). Replace the gasket (antenna or
coupler interface) if damaged.
4- Connect the cable and protect the connector with isolation tape.
5- Connect the cable on the IDU side.
Apply the following procedure:
7.7 - REPLACING AN ODU
The link is established without alarms. All Leds are green.
7.6.8 - Normal link no alarms
Check the alarm configuration ( 5.6 -).
7.6.7 - Link established correctly but with some alarms
Switch off the Modem connected to the ODU (check that the green Modem Led is off).
Disconnect the ODU cable (IDU side).
Remove the two screws.
Remove the Modem and replace by a new one.
Attach the Modem with the screws and connect the cable to the ODU.
Power up the Modem.
Load the configuration file saved previously to avoid having to reconfigure everything (see 6.2 -).
Switch off the Modem(s).
Remove all cables from the IDU.
Remove the IDU.
Remove the Modem(s) from the IDU and install them in the new IDU.
Install the new IDU and reconnect all cables.
Switch on the IDU, reconfigure network access using the VT100 serial link.
Connect a Pilot and load the previously saved configuration file.
Remove the two screws.

Remove the FAN module and replace by a new one.
Attach the FAN module with the screws
Wait a few seconds and make sure the FAN speed is regulated and that there is no alarm
Page 7-15
1- Switch off the Modem(s).

2- Disconnect from the MUX64 SPDH shelf the power supply cable then the 2 Mbit/s interface cable
("Trib extension" connector) connected to the IDU.
3- Replace the MUX64 SPDH shelf.
4- Connect again the 2 Mbit/s interface cable then the power supply cable.
5- Switch on the Modem(s).
7.11 - REPLACING A MUX64 SPDH SHELF
Note: the FAN module is fully hot-extractible and hot-pluggable.
1234-
7.10 - REPLACING A FAN MODULE
12345678-
7.9 - REPLACING AN IDU
Note: for a 1+1 system, a Modem can be replaced with the second one operating. Before replacing it,
select manual switching Tx, Rx and Master on the transmitter and the receiver, which continue to operate
(see 6.22 -).
Once the change has been done, return to automatic switching.
123456-
7.8 - REPLACING A MODEM
6 GHz (6L) *
6 GHz (6H) *
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
26 GHz
32 GHz
38 GHz
Duplex spacing
* = ODU-H only
* = ODU-H only
6 GHz (6L) *
6 GHz (6H) *
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
26 GHz
32 GHz
38 GHz
Frequency bands
Page A1-1
240, 252.04 MHz

340 MHz
154, 160, 161, 168, 196, 245 MHz,
119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266, 311.32 MHz
490, 500, 530 MHz
266 MHz
315, 420, 475, 490, 640, 644, 728 MHz
1010, 1560 MHz
1008, 1200, 1232 MHz
800, 1008 MHz
812 MHz
700, 1260 MHz
5.9 GHz - 6.4 GHz

6.4 GHz - 7.1 GHz
7.1 GHz - 7.7GHz
7.7 GHz - 8.5 GHz
10.7 GHz - 11.7 GHz
12.75 GHz - 13.25 GHz
14.4 GHz - 15.35 GHz
17.7 GHz - 19.7 GHz
21.2 GHz - 23.6 GHz
24.5 GHz - 26.5 GHz
31.8 GHz - 33.4 GHz
37 GHz - 39.5 GHz
EN 302 217
All bands
Applicable ETSI standards
6L, 6H, 7, 8, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 32,

38 GHz
Giga Ethernet 1000BaseSX, 1000BaseLX,
10/100/1000BaseT
10/100BaseT Ethernet
0, 2, 4 8, 16, 32, 48, 64, or 80 x 2 Mbit/s
Unprotected
Hot standby (HSB)
Space or frequency diversity
XPIC or frequency diversity
Bitrates
Frequency bands
Radio configuration (protection) 1+0

1+1
1+1
2+0
Versions and configurations
General characteristics
APPENDIX 1- SLF-H SPECIFICATIONS
see APPENDIX 2 and 1.2.6 -
Frequency agility
Page A1-2
Frequency stability
Frequency step
Output power with Transmit

Mute "
Dynamic range
Automatic Tx Power Control

(ATPC algorithm)
Power step
Output power
10 ppm
250 kHz
<-50 dBm
0.5 dB
QPSK
Please refer to
the Performance
sheets
0.5 dB
10 ppm
250 kHz
<-50 dBm
10 ppm
250 kHz
<-50 dBm
10 ppm
250 kHz
<-50 dBm
0.5 dB
64QAM/128QAM
256QAM
Please refer to
Please refer to
the Performance the Performance
sheets
sheets
Max Power Min Power
0.5 dB
16QAM/32QAM
Please refer to
the Performance
sheets
LDPC
Error-correcting code
Transmission characteristics
7MHz, 14 MHz, 28 MHz
Tx-Tx spacing
(ODU-NL / ODU-N)
7MHz, 14 MHz, 28 MHz, 56 MHz
QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM
Modulation (fixed)
(ODU-N)
Tx-Tx spacing
(ODU-HL / ODU-H)
QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM,

64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM
Modulation (fixed and ACM)

(ODU-HL / ODU-H / ODU-NL)
< 10
-12
RSSI voltage accuracy

RSL indication accuracy (from the Pilot)
Analog RSSI voltage (ODU BNC connector)
-6
Page A1-3
4.5V 20 dBm; 0.1V 90 dBm, courbe monotone

Loi de variation: RSL (dBm) = 15.77 VBNC-91.58
3 dB
3 dB
When receive signal level is 5dB above the 10

threshold and less than -30dBm
2 dB / 6.5 dB
1+1 coupler losses - 6 dB (channel 1/channel 2)
Residual error rate
3.5 dB / 3.5 dB
-22 dBm
Maximum level for BER < 10-6
1+1 coupler losses - 3 dB (channel 1/channel 2)
-10 dBm
Maximum non destructive level at ODU input
Reception characteristics
0, 2, 4 8, 16, 32, 48, 64 or 80 x2 Mbit/s / 120 : or 75 : - IUT-R G. 703 2xDB44HD

+4xDB78HD
1 to 4 GE, 1000BaseSX optical SFP, 1000BaseLX, 10/100/1000BaseT electrical SFP
Page A1-4
Impedance
Length
IDU/ODU interconnection
1+0
1+1
Station shelf (IDU)

Radio box (ODU)
Optional MUX64 SPDH
Installation
Weight
IDU without TNM and without Modem
IDU with TNM and without Modem
MODEM
FAN module
Optional MUX64 SPDH
Radio box (ODU-H / ODU-N)
Radio box (ODU-HL / ODU-NL)
Dimensions
Station shelf (IDU)
Radio box (ODU)
Optional MUX64 SPDH
Type
Interfaces Ethernet 10/100BaseT, RJ45
Access PC RS232 DB9
Interface Ethernet 10/100BaseT RJ45
DB15 HD
DB15 HD
1 coaxial cable
2 coaxial cables
50 :
Maximum attenuation of 18dB at 350MHz
19 inches rack
Tubes diameter 50 mm to 115 mm
19 inches rack
3.050 Kg
3.250 Kg
0.376 Kg
0.270 Kg
1.9 Kg
5 kg
4 kg
1U, 19 inches : 44(H) x 485 (L) x 300 (D) mm

Diameter: 267 mm, Depth: 89 mm
0.6U, 19 inches : 26(H) x 485 (L) x 170 (D) mm
Mechanical characteristics
2 (Integ. Hub)
VT100 interface
Network management interfaces
Number
3
Wayside
External alarms (inputs)
Alarm relays (outputs)
Alarms, wayside and network management interfaces
2 Mbit/s
Giga Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet / 2 Mbit/s access
< 50W (typ.: 40W)

<35W (typ.: 25W)
<45W (typ.: 35W)
ODU-HL
ODU-H
ODU-NL
ODU-N
EN 301 489-1/4
Electromagnetic compatibility
Page A1-5
The radiation exposure depends on transmit power value, on antenna gain and on the distance from the
antenna.
The analysis and below result takes the worst case: maximum transmit power and radiation on the antenna
axis.
The maximum exposure limit figures to consider are 50 W/m (occupational), or 10 W/m (general public).
This chapter gives the safety distance from the antenna, according to R&TTE Art 3.1a EMF Effects on
Health.
Health characteristics
EN 300 019-1-2 class 2.3
Transport conditions
(equipment packed)
-5C to +45C
-33 C to +55C
EN 300 019-1-1 class 1.1
IDU, MUX64 SPDH

ODU
Temperature range
Storage conditions
(equipment packed)
IDU, MUX64 SPDH

ODU
Environmental conditions
EN 300 019-1-3 class 3.1
EN 300 019-1-4 class 4.1
<40W (typ.: 30W)
IDU only
TNM
MODEM
FAN module
Optional MUX64 SPDH
Example: IDU-H/1+0/GE without TNM
Power consumption
Environmental characteristics
< 15W (typ.: 8.5W)

< 7W (typ.: 5W)
< 20W (typ.: 15W)
< 10W (typ.: 6W)
< 30W (typ.: 25W)
Typical = 29W
-39 V to -59 V
Input voltage
Power consumption
Page A1-6
Note: with antenna diameters greater than 0.75m, the 10W/m is not reached.
Antenna diameter: 0.3 up to 0.75 m:

region with exposure > 10 W/m
4m
UHHxx
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Minimum configuration for one link.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
wo
UFC_HW P2
(070)
2
2
wo
UFC_HX P2
(070)
2
2
wo
SW150
(optional ACM)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
wo
wo
SW300
(optional ACM)
2+0 XPIC
(2
antenna
ports)
without
pole
mounting,
coupler
1+1 SD
or FD or
2+0 FD
(2
antenna
ports)
without
pole
mounting,
coupler
1+1
HSB
(1
antenna
port)
(3 or 6
dB
coupler)
1+0
GE / 70 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 70 Mbps
GE / 150 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 150 Mbps
GE / 300 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 300 Mbps
GE / 400 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 400 Mbps
GE / 70 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 70 Mbps
GE / 150 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 150 Mbps
GE / 300 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 300 Mbps
GE / 400 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 400 Mbps
GE / 70 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 70 Mbps
GE / 150 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 150 Mbps
GE / 300 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 300 Mbps
GE / 400 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 400 Mbps
GE / 70 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 70 Mbps
GE / 150 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 150 Mbps
GE / 300 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 300 Mbps
GE / 400 Mbps
GE + 16 E1 / 400 Mbps
SLF-H
UHBxx
LB
IDU-H
GE GE+ 16E1 SFP FAN
UFX_SP P2
HB
SW400
(optional ACM)
MODEM-H
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Page A2-1
SFP GE
ODU-H
Depending on the configuration, a SLF-H link is composed of the following items:
UFX _SP P2
+ UFE_16E1
Link composition
UFF P2
APPENDIX 2 - SLF-H REFERENCES
UFDxxCy : Coupler
Page A2-2
CHB07-A161-01-00
CHH07-A161-01-00
CHB07-A161-02-00
CHH07-A161-02-00
CHB07-A160-01-00
CHH07-A160-01-00
CHB07-A160-02-00
CHH07-A160-02-00
CHB07-A160-03-00
CHH07-A160-03-00
CHB07-C154-01-00
CHH07-C154-01-00
CHB07-C154-02-00
CHH07-C154-02-00
CHB07-C154-03-00
CHH07-C154-03-00
CHB07-C154-04-00
CHH07-C154-04-00
CHB07-B154-01-00
CHH07-B154-01-00
CHB07-B154-02-00
CHH07-B154-02-00
CHB07-B154-03-00
CHH07-B154-03-00
253375956
253375964
253375977
253375985
253375899
253375901
253375914
253375922
253375935
253375943
253375815
253375828
253375836
253375849
253375857
253375860
253375878
253375881
253375753
253375766
253375774
253375787
253375795
253375807
7,117.0
7,278.0
7,159.0
7,320.0
7,433.5
7,593.5
7,478.5
7,638.5
7,526.0
7,686.0
7,135.0
7,289.0
7,163.0
7,317.0
7,191.0
7,345.0
7,219.0
7,373.0
7,128.0
7,282.0
7,170.0
7,324.0
7,212.0
7,366.0
7,428.0
7,582.0
7,470.0
7,624.0
7,512.0
7,666.0
7,180.0
7,341.0
7,222.0
7,383.0
7,496.5
7,656.5
7,541.5
7,701.5
7,589.0
7,749.0
7,198.0
7,352.0
7,226.0
7,380.0
7,254.0
7,408.0
7,282.0
7,436.0
7,184.0
7,338.0
7,226.0
7,380.0
7,268.0
7,422.0
7,484.0
7,638.0
7,526.0
7,680.0
7,568.0
7,722.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
161
161
161
161
160
160
160
160
160
160
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
T to R
(MHz)
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
ODU SLH 07GHZ TR A161 LO B1

ODU SLH 07GHZ TR A161 HI B1

ODU SLH 07GHZ TR C154 LO B1

ODU SLH 07GHZ TR C154 HI B1
ODU SLH 07GHZ TR B154 LO B1

ODU SLH 07GHZ TR B154 HI B1

CHB07-A154-01-00
CHH07-A154-01-00
CHB07-A154-02-00
CHH07-A154-02-00
CHB07-A154-03-00
CHH07-A154-03-00
ODU SLH 07GHZ TR YYYY LO XX
7 GHz ODUs
Sagem Description
ODU SLH 07GHZ TR YYYY HI XX
253375691
253375703
253375711
253375724
253375732
253375745
Sagem
P/N
CHB07-YYYY-XX-00
CHH07-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem Model
Number
It covers channel bandwidth from 7MHz to 56MHz and modulation schemes from QPSK to 256QAM.
References of ODUs HL
253375998
253376007
253376015
253376028
253376036
253376049
253376057
253376060
253376078
253376081
253376099
253376101
253376114
253376122
253376135
253376143
253376156
253376164
253376177
253376185
253376198
253376205
253376218
253376226
253376239
253376247
253376250
253376268
253376271
253376289
253376292
253376304
253376312
253376325
253376333
253376346
253376354
253376367
253376375
253376388
253376396
253376408
253376416
253376429
CHB07-A161-03-00
CHH07-A161-03-00
CHB07-A161-04-00
CHH07-A161-04-00
CHB07-B161-01-00
CHH07-B161-01-00
CHB07-B161-02-00
CHH07-B161-02-00
CHB07-B161-03-00
CHH07-B161-03-00
CHB07-B161-04-00
CHH07-B161-04-00
CHB07-C161-01-00
CHH07-C161-01-00
CHB07-C161-02-00
CHH07-C161-02-00
CHB07-C161-03-00
CHH07-C161-03-00
CHB07-C161-04-00
CHH07-C161-04-00
CHB07-D161-01-00
CHH07-D161-01-00
CHB07-D161-02-00
CHH07-D161-02-00
CHB07-D161-03-00
CHH07-D161-03-00
CHB07-D161-04-00
CHH07-D161-04-00
CHB07-E161-01-00
CHH07-E161-01-00
CHB07-E161-02-00
CHH07-E161-02-00
CHB07-E161-03-00
CHH07-E161-03-00
CHB07-E161-04-00
CHH07-E161-04-00
CHB07-F161-01-00
CHH07-F161-01-00
CHB07-F161-02-00
CHH07-F161-02-00
CHB07-F161-03-00
CHH07-F161-03-00
CHB07-F161-04-00
CHH07-F161-04-00

ODU SLH 07GHZ TR D161 LO B1
ODU SLH 07GHZ TR D161 HI B1
ODU SLH 07GHZ TR E161 LO B1
ODU SLH 07GHZ TR E161 HI B1
ODU SLH 07GHZ TR F161 LO B1
ODU SLH 07GHZ TR F161 HI B1
Sagem Description
Sagem
P/N
Sagem Model
Number
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,198.0
7,261.0
7,359.0
7,422.0
7,213.0
7,276.0
7,374.0
7,437.0
7,417.0
7,480.0
7,578.0
7,641.0
7,459.0
7,522.0
7,620.0
7,683.0
7,498.0
7,561.0
7,659.0
7,722.0
7,513.0
7,576.0
7,674.0
7,737.0
7,114.0
7,177.0
7,275.0
7,338.0
7,149.0
7,212.0
7,310.0
7,373.0
7,184.0
7,247.0
7,345.0
7,408.0
7,219.0
7,282.0
7,380.0
7,443.0
7,239.0
7,302.0
7,400.0
7,463.0
7,274.0
7,337.0
7,435.0
7,498.0
7,309.0
7,372.0
7,470.0
7,533.0
7,344.0
7,407.0
7,505.0
7,568.0
7,414.0
7,477.0
7,575.0
7,638.0
7,449.0
7,512.0
7,610.0
7,673.0
7,484.0
7,547.0
7,645.0
7,708.0
7,519.0
7,582.0
7,680.0
7,743.0
7,539.0
7,602.0
7,700.0
7,763.0
7,574.0
7,637.0
7,735.0
7,798.0
7,609.0
7,672.0
7,770.0
7,833.0
7,644.0
7,707.0
7,805.0
7,868.0
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-3
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
T to R
(MHz)
Page A2-4
8,279.0
8,398.0
8,293.0
8,412.0
8,307.0
8,426.0
8,321.0
8,440.0
8,335.0
7,400.0
7,645.0
7,484.0
7,729.0
7,568.0
7,813.0
7,093.0
7,289.0
7,121.0
7,317.0
7,149.0
7,345.0
7,177.0
7,373.0
7,205.0
7,401.0
7,093.0
7,261.0
7,149.0
7,317.0
7,205.0
7,373.0
8,307.0
8,426.0
8,321.0
8,440.0
8,335.0
8,454.0
8,349.0
8,468.0
8,363.0
7,484.0
7,729.0
7,568.0
7,813.0
7,652.0
7,897.0
7,149.0
7,345.0
7,177.0
7,373.0
7,205.0
7,401.0
7,233.0
7,429.0
7,261.0
7,457.0
7,149.0
7,317.0
7,205.0
7,373.0
7,261.0
7,429.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,443.0
7,499.0
7,611.0
7,667.0
7,485.0
7,541.0
7,653.0
7,709.0
7,527.0
7,583.0
7,695.0
7,751.0
119 & 126

119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
245
245
245
245
245
245
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
T to R
(MHz)
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
84
84
84
84
84
84
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
8 GHz ODUs


253376713
253376726
253376734
253376747
253376755
253376768
253376776
253376789
253376797
253376651
253376669
253376672
253376680
253376693
253376705
CHB07-A245-01-00
CHH07-A245-01-00
CHB07-A245-02-00
CHH07-A245-02-00
CHB07-A245-03-00
CHH07-A245-03-00

CHB08-A126-01-00
CHH08-A126-01-00
CHB08-A126-02-00
CHH08-A126-02-00
CHB08-A126-03-00
CHH08-A126-03-00
CHB08-A126-04-00
CHH08-A126-04-00
CHB08-A126-05-00
253376557
253376565
253376578
253376586
253376599
253376606
253376619
253376627
253376630
253376648
CHB07-A196-01-00
CHH07-A196-01-00
CHB07-A196-02-00
CHH07-A196-02-00
CHB07-A196-03-00
CHH07-A196-03-00
CHB07-A196-04-00
CHH07-A196-04-00
CHB07-A196-05-00
CHH07-A196-05-00

253376490
253376502
253376515
253376523
253376536
253376544
CHB07-B168-01-00
CHH07-B168-01-00
CHB07-B168-02-00
CHH07-B168-02-00
CHB07-B168-03-00
CHH07-B168-03-00

Sagem Description
CHB08-YYYY-XX-00
CHH08-YYYY-XX-00
253376437
253376440
253376458
253376461
253376479
253376482
Sagem
P/N
CHB07-A168-01-00
CHH07-A168-01-00
CHB07-A168-02-00
CHH07-A168-02-00
CHB07-A168-03-00
CHH07-A168-03-00
Sagem Model
Number
253376990
253377009
253377012
253377020
253377033
253377041
253377054
253377062
253377075
253377083
CHB08-A213-01-00
CHH08-A213-01-00
CHB08-A266-01-00
CHH08-A266-01-00
CHB08-A266-02-00
CHH08-A266-02-00
CHB08-A311-01-00
CHH08-A311-01-00
CHB08-A311-02-00
CHH08-A311-02-00
CHB08-A311-03-00
CHH08-A311-03-00

CHB11-A490-01-00
CHH11-A490-01-00
CHB11-A490-02-00
CHH11-A490-02-00
CHB11-A490-03-00
CHH11-A490-03-00
11 GHz ODUs

CHB11-YYYY-XX-00
CHH11-YYYY-XX-00
253377096
253377103
253377116
253377124
253377137
253377145
253376979 ODU SLH 08GHZ TR A213 LO B1

253376987 ODU SLH 08GHZ TR A213 HI B1

253376891
253376903
253376916
253376924
253376937
253376945
253376958
253376966
CHB08-A208-01-00
CHH08-A208-01-00
CHB08-A208-02-00
CHH08-A208-02-00
CHB08-A208-03-00
CHH08-A208-03-00
CHB08-A208-04-00
CHH08-A208-04-00


253376838
253376841
253376859
253376862
253376870
253376883
CHB08-A151-01-00
CHH08-A151-01-00
CHB08-A151-02-00
CHH08-A151-02-00
CHB08-A151-03-00
CHH08-A151-03-00
Sagem Description

Sagem
P/N
CHH08-A126-05-00
CHB08-A126-06-00
CHH08-A126-06-00
Sagem Model
Number
10,675.0
11,165.0
10,795.0
11,285.0
10,915.0
11,405.0
7,731.0
8,042.0
7,835.0
8,146.0
7,717.0
8,028.0
7,905.0
8,171.0
8,017.0
8,283.0
8,005.0
8,219.0
8,043.0
8,251.0
8,099.0
8,307.0
8,155.0
8,363.0
8,211.0
8,419.0
8,203.0
8,355.0
8,240.0
8,392.0
8,277.0
8,429.0
10,855.0
11,345.0
10,975.0
11,465.0
11,095.0
11,585.0
7,867.0
8,178.0
7,971.0
8,282.0
7,867.0
8,178.0
8,024.0
8,290.0
8,136.0
8,402.0
8,075.0
8,289.0
8,113.0
8,321.0
8,169.0
8,377.0
8,225.0
8,433.0
8,281.0
8,489.0
8,271.0
8,423.0
8,308.0
8,460.0
8,345.0
8,497.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
8,454.0
8,482.0
8,349.0
8,377.0
8,468.0
8,496.0
180
180
180
180
180
180
136
136
136
136
136
136
119
119
119
119
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
28
28
28
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-5
490
490
490
490
490
490
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
266
266
266
266
213.5
213.5
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
119 & 126

119 & 126
119 & 126
T to R
(MHz)
Page A2-6
14,746.0
15,061.0
14,844.0
15,159.0
14,942.0
15,257.0
12,814.0
13,080.0
12,870.0
13,136.0
12,926.0
13,192.0
12,982.0
13,248.0
10,855.0
11,385.0
10,975.0
11,505.0
11,135.0
11,665.0
11,215.0
11,745.0
10,890.0
11,390.0
11,045.0
11,545.0
11,200.0
11,700.0
14,501.0 14,613.0
14,921.0 15,033.0
14,627.0
14,942.0
14,725.0
15,040.0
14,823.0
15,138.0
12,751.0
13,017.0
12,807.0
13,073.0
12,863.0
13,129.0
12,919.0
13,185.0
10,675.0
11,205.0
10,795.0
11,325.0
10,915.0
11,445.0
11,035.0
11,565.0
10,700.0
11,200.0
10,855.0
11,355.0
11,010.0
11,510.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
11,035.0 11,215.0
11,525.0 11,705.0
420
420
315
315
315
315
315
315
266
266
266
266
266
266
266
266
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
490 & 500

490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490
490
T to R
(MHz)
112
112
119
119
119
119
119
119
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
180
180
180
180
220
220
180
180
190
190
190
190
190
190
180
180
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)

CHB15-A420-01-00
CHH15-A420-01-00

15 GHz ODUs

253377398
253377400
253377413
253377421
253377434
253377442
253377314
253377327
253377335
253377348
253377356
253377369
253377377
253377380
13 GHz ODUs
CHB15-A315-01-00
CHH15-A315-01-00
CHB15-A315-02-00
CHH15-A315-02-00
CHB15-A315-03-00
CHH15-A315-03-00
CHB15-YYYY-XX-00
CHH15-YYYY-XX-00
CHB13-A266-01-00
CHH13-A266-01-00
CHB13-A266-02-00
CHH13-A266-02-00
CHB13-A266-03-00
CHH13-A266-03-00
CHB13-A266-04-00
CHH13-A266-04-00
CHB13-YYYY-XX-00
CHH13-YYYY-XX-00
253377231
253377244
253377252
253377265
253377273
253377286
253377294
253377306
CHB11-A530-01-00
CHH11-A530-01-00
CHB11-A530-02-00
CHH11-A530-02-00
CHB11-A530-03-00
CHH11-A530-03-00
CHB11-A530-04-00
CHH11-A530-04-00


253377179
253377187
253377190
253377202
253377210
253377223
CHB11-A490-05-00
CHH11-A490-05-00
CHB11-A490-06-00
CHH11-A490-06-00
CHB11-A490-07-00
CHH11-A490-07-00
Sagem Description

Sagem
P/N
CHB11-A490-04-00
CHH11-A490-04-00
Sagem Model
Number
253377591
253377603
253377611
253377624
253377632
253377645
253377653
253377666
253377674
253377687
253377695
253377707
253377715
253377728
253377736
253377749
253377757
253377760

CHB15-A490-01-00
CHH15-A490-01-00
CHB15-A490-02-00
CHH15-A490-02-00
CHB15-A490-03-00
CHH15-A490-03-00
CHB15-A490-04-00
CHH15-A490-04-00
CHB15-A640-01-00
CHH15-A640-01-00
CHB15-A640-02-00
CHH15-A640-02-00
CHB15-A644-01-00
CHH15-A644-01-00
CHB15-A644-02-00
CHH15-A644-02-00
CHB15-A644-03-00
CHH15-A644-03-00
CHB15-A728-01-00
CHH15-A728-01-00
253377799 ODU SLH 18GHZ TR 1010 LO B1

253377801 ODU SLH 18GHZ TR 1010 HI B1
253377814 ODU SLH 18GHZ TR 1010 LO B2
18 GHz ODUs




CHB18-1010-01-00
CHH18-1010-01-00
CHB18-1010-02-00
CHB18-YYYY-XX-00
CHH18-YYYY-XX-00
253377538
253377546
253377559
253377567
253377570
253377588
CHB15-A475-01-00
CHH15-A475-01-00
CHB15-A475-02-00
CHH15-A475-02-00
CHB15-A475-03-00
CHH15-A475-03-00

253377476
253377484
253377497
253377504
253377517
253377525
CHB15-A420-02-00
CHH15-A420-02-00
CHB15-A420-03-00
CHH15-A420-03-00
CHB15-A420-04-00
CHH15-A420-04-00
Sagem Description
Sagem
P/N
Sagem Model
Number
14,512.0
15,156.0
14,610.0
15,254.0
14,708.0
15,352.0
14,610.0
15,250.0
14,715.0
15,355.0
14,522.0
15,012.0
14,634.0
15,124.0
14,746.0
15,236.0
14,858.0
15,348.0
14,668.0
15,143.0
14,828.0
15,303.0
14,883.0
15,358.0
17,685.0 17,985.0
18,695.0 18,995.0
17,930.0 18,230.0
14,500.0 14,615.0
15,228.0 15,343.0
14,400.0
15,044.0
14,498.0
15,142.0
14,596.0
15,240.0
14,500.0
15,140.0
14,605.0
15,245.0
14,403.0
14,893.0
14,515.0
15,005.0
14,627.0
15,117.0
14,739.0
15,229.0
14,500.0
14,975.0
14,660.0
15,135.0
14,783.0
15,258.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
14,606.0 14,725.0
15,026.0 15,145.0
14,718.0 14,837.0
15,138.0 15,257.0
14,816.0 14,928.0
15,236.0 15,348.0
300
300
300
115
115
112
112
112
112
112
112
110
110
110
110
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
168
168
168
168
100
100
119
119
119
119
112
112
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-7
1010
1010
1010
728
728
644
644
644
644
644
644
640
640
640
640
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
475
475
475
475
475
475
420
420
420
420
420
420
T to R
(MHz)
Page A2-8
253378118
253378126
253378139
253378147
253378150
253378168
253378171
253378056
253378064
253378077
253378085
253378098
253378105
CHB23-1200-05-00
CHH23-1200-05-00
CHB23-1200-06-00
CHH23-1200-06-00
CHB23-1200-07-00
CHH23-1200-07-00
CHB23-1232-01-00
CHH23-1232-01-00
CHB23-1232-02-00
CHH23-1232-02-00
CHB23-1232-03-00
CHH23-1232-03-00
CHB23-1232-04-00
253377971
253377989
253377992
253378001
253378014
253378022
253378035
253378043
CHB23-1200-01-00
CHH23-1200-01-00
CHB23-1200-02-00
CHH23-1200-02-00
CHB23-1200-03-00
CHH23-1200-03-00
CHB23-1200-04-00
CHH23-1200-04-00
21,200.0
22,432.0
21,472.0
22,704.0
21,779.0
23,011.0
22,086.0
21,200.0
22,400.0
21,600.0
22,800.0
22,000.0
23,200.0
21,200.0
22,400.0
21,490.0
22,690.0
21,780.0
22,980.0
22,070.0
23,270.0
21,994.0
23,002.0
22,274.0
23,282.0
17,700.0
19,260.0
17,840.0
19,400.0
17,700.0
19,260.0
21,500.0
22,732.0
21,786.0
23,018.0
22,093.0
23,325.0
22,386.0
21,600.0
22,800.0
22,000.0
23,200.0
22,400.0
23,600.0
21,530.0
22,730.0
21,820.0
23,020.0
22,110.0
23,310.0
22,400.0
23,600.0
22,330.0
23,338.0
22,610.0
23,618.0
18,000.0
19,560.0
18,140.0
19,700.0
18,140.0
19,700.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
18,940.0 19,240.0
18,180.0 18,480.0
19,190.0 19,490.0
18,400.0 18,700.0
19,410.0 19,710.0
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
300
300
314
314
314
314
300
400
400
400
400
400
400
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
336
336
336
336
300
300
300
300
440
440
300
300
300
300
300
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
1008
1008
1008
1008
1560
1560
1560
1560
1560
1560
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
T to R
(MHz)
ODU SLH 23GHZ TR 1232 LO B1

ODU SLH 23GHZ TR 1232 HI B1



253377939
253377947
253377950
253377968
CHB23-1008-01-00
CHH23-1008-01-00
CHB23-1008-02-00
CHH23-1008-02-00
23 GHz ODUs

253377877
253377885
253377898
253377905
253377918
253377926
CHB18-1560-01-00
CHH18-1560-01-00
CHB18-1560-02-00
CHH18-1560-02-00
CHB18-1560-03-00
CHH18-1560-03-00

Sagem Description
CHB23-YYYY-XX-00
CHH23-YYYY-XX-00
253377822
253377835
253377843
253377856
253377864
Sagem
P/N
CHH18-1010-02-00
CHB18-1010-03-00
CHH18-1010-03-00
CHB18-1010-04-00
CHH18-1010-04-00
Sagem Model
Number
Sagem Description

253378316
253378329
253378337
253378340
253378358
253378361
253378379
253378382
253378390
253378402
253378415
253378423
CHB38-A700-01-00
CHH38-A700-01-00
CHB38-A700-02-00
CHH38-A700-02-00
CHB38-A700-03-00
CHH38-A700-03-00
CHB38-A700-04-00
CHH38-A700-04-00
CHB38-1260-01-00
CHH38-1260-01-00
CHB38-1260-02-00
CHH38-1260-02-00

CHB38-YYYY-XX-00
CHH38-YYYY-XX-00
38 GHz ODUs

CHB32-A812-01-00
CHH32-A812-01-00
CHB32-A812-02-00
CHH32-A812-02-00
253378275
253378288
253378296
253378308
CHB32-YYYY-XX-00
CHH32-YYYY-XX-00
32 GHz ODUs

CHB26-1008-01-00
CHH26-1008-01-00
CHB26-1008-02-00
CHH26-1008-02-00
CHB26-1008-03-00
CHH26-1008-03-00
253378212
253378225
253378233
253378246
253378254
253378267

26 GHz ODUs
253378189 ODU SLH 23GHZ TR 1232 HI B4
Sagem
P/N
CHB26-A800-01-00
CHH26-A800-01-00
CHB26-YYYY-XX-00
CHH26-YYYY-XX-00
CHH23-1232-04-00
Sagem Model
Number
37,044.0
38,304.0
37,604.0
38,864.0
38,595.0
39,295.0
38,795.0
39,495.0
38,995.0
39,695.0
39,195.0
39,895.0
31,815.0
32,627.0
32,179.0
32,991.0
24,549.0
25,557.0
24,829.0
25,837.0
25,109.0
26,117.0
37,632.0
38,892.0
38,192.0
39,452.0
38,805.0
39,505.0
39,005.0
39,705.0
39,205.0
39,905.0
39,405.0
40,105.0
32,207.0
33,019.0
32,571.0
33,383.0
24,885.0
25,893.0
25,165.0
26,173.0
25,445.0
26,453.0
24,250.0 24,450.0
25,050.0 25,250.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
23,318.0 23,618.0
588
588
588
588
210
210
210
210
210
210
210
210
392
392
392
392
336
336
336
336
336
336
Page A2-9
1260
1260
1260
1260
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
812
812
812
812
1008
1008
1008
1008
1008
1008
200
200
300
1232
800
800
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
T to R
(MHz)
7,484.0
7,638.0
7,526.0
7,680.0
7,568.0
7,722.0
7,184.0
7,128.0
6,540.0
6,880.0
6,630.0
6,970.0
6,710.0
7,050.0
6,780.0
7,120.0
6,025.0
6,275.0
6,100.0
6,350.0
6,175.0
6,425.0
6,025.0
6,275.0
6,100.0
6,350.0
6,175.0
6,425.0
7,428.0
7,582.0
7,470.0
7,624.0
7,512.0
7,666.0
6,430.0
6,770.0
6,520.0
6,860.0
6,600.0
6,940.0
6,670.0
7,010.0
5,925.0
6,175.0
6,000.0
6,250.0
6,075.0
6,325.0
5,925.0
6,175.0
6,000.0
6,250.0
6,075.0
6,325.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
340
340
340
340
340
340
340
340
252.04
252.04
252.04
252.04
252.04
252.04
240
240
240
240
240
240
T to R
(MHz)
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
253250493 ODU SLH 07GHZ TR B154 LO B1
UHB07-B154-01-00
Page A2-10

252957519
252957527
252957530
252957548
252957551
252957569
UHB07-A154-01-00
UHH07-A154-01-00
UHB07-A154-02-00
UHH07-A154-02-00
UHB07-A154-03-00
UHH07-A154-03-00
7 GHz ODUs

253086872
253086885
253086893
253086939
253086947
253086950
253086968
253086971
UHB06-A340-01-00
UHH06-A340-01-00
UHB06-A340-02-00
UHH06-A340-02-00
UHB06-A340-03-00
UHH06-A340-03-00
UHB06-A340-04-00
UHH06-A340-04-00


6 GHz ODUs
Sagem Description
UHB07-YYYY-XX-00
UHH07-YYYY-XX-00
253086799
253086801
253086822
253086830
253086851
253086864
253086728
253086749
253086757
253086760
253086778
253086781
Sagem
P/N
UHB06-A252-01-00
UHH06-A252-01-00
UHB06-A252-02-00
UHH06-A252-02-00
UHB06-A252-03-00
UHH06-A252-03-00
UHB06-A240-01-00
UHH06-A240-01-00
UHB06-A240-02-00
UHH06-A240-02-00
UHB06-A240-03-00
UHH06-A240-03-00
UHB06-YYYY-XX-00
UHH06-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem Model
Number
References of ODUs H
253250505
253250518
253250526
253250539
253250547
253262802
253262815
253262823
253262836
253262844
253262857
253262865
253262878
252957572
252957580
252957593
252957605
252957613
252957626
252957634
252957647
252957655
252957668
252957676
252957689
252957697
252957709
252957717
252957720
252957738
252957741
252957759
252957762
252957770
252957783
253086989
253086992
253087001
253087019
253087022
253087030
253087043
UHH07-B154-01-00
UHB07-B154-02-00
UHH07-B154-02-00
UHB07-B154-03-00
UHH07-B154-03-00
UHB07-C154-01-00
UHH07-C154-01-00
UHB07-C154-02-00
UHH07-C154-02-00
UHB07-C154-03-00
UHH07-C154-03-00
UHB07-C154-04-00
UHH07-C154-04-00
UHB07-A160-01-00
UHH07-A160-01-00
UHB07-A160-02-00
UHH07-A160-02-00
UHB07-A160-03-00
UHH07-A160-03-00
UHB07-A161-01-00
UHH07-A161-01-00
UHB07-A161-02-00
UHH07-A161-02-00
UHB07-A161-03-00
UHH07-A161-03-00
UHB07-A161-04-00
UHH07-A161-04-00
UHB07-B161-01-00
UHH07-B161-01-00
UHB07-B161-02-00
UHH07-B161-02-00
UHB07-B161-03-00
UHH07-B161-03-00
UHB07-B161-04-00
UHH07-B161-04-00
UHB07-C161-01-00
UHH07-C161-01-00
UHB07-C161-02-00
UHH07-C161-02-00
UHB07-C161-03-00
UHH07-C161-03-00
UHB07-C161-04-00




Sagem Description
Sagem
P/N
Sagem Model
Number
7,117.0
7,278.0
7,159.0
7,320.0
7,198.0
7,359.0
7,213.0
7,374.0
7,417.0
7,578.0
7,459.0
7,620.0
7,498.0
7,659.0
7,513.0
7,674.0
7,114.0
7,275.0
7,149.0
7,310.0
7,184.0
7,345.0
7,219.0
7,433.5
7,593.5
7,478.5
7,638.5
7,526.0
7,686.0
7,180.0
7,341.0
7,222.0
7,383.0
7,261.0
7,422.0
7,276.0
7,437.0
7,480.0
7,641.0
7,522.0
7,683.0
7,561.0
7,722.0
7,576.0
7,737.0
7,177.0
7,338.0
7,212.0
7,373.0
7,247.0
7,408.0
7,282.0
7,496.5
7,656.5
7,541.5
7,701.5
7,589.0
7,749.0
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Page A2-11
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
160
160
160
160
160
160
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
7,135.0
7,289.0
7,163.0
7,317.0
7,191.0
7,345.0
7,219.0
7,373.0
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
56
56
56
56
154
154
154
154
154
7,198.0
7,352.0
7,226.0
7,380.0
7,254.0
7,408.0
7,282.0
7,436.0
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
T to R
(MHz)
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,282.0
7,338.0
7,170.0
7,226.0
7,324.0
7,380.0
7,212.0
7,268.0
7,366.0
7,422.0
253337287
253337323
253337344
253337365
253337373
253337394
252957791
252957803
252957816
252957824
252957837
252957845
253087382
253087390
253087402
253087410
253087423
UHB07-B168-01-00
UHH07-B168-01-00
UHB07-B168-02-00
UHH07-B168-02-00
UHB07-B168-03-00
UHH07-B168-03-00
UHB07-A168-01-00
UHH07-A168-01-00
UHB07-A168-02-00
UHH07-A168-02-00
UHB07-A168-03-00
UHH07-A168-03-00
UHB07-A196-01-00
UHH07-A196-01-00
UHB07-A196-02-00
UHH07-A196-02-00
UHB07-A196-03-00
Page A2-12
253087051
253087064
253087072
253087085
253087105
253087118
253087147
253087150
253087168
253087171
253087192
253087209
253087212
253087220
253087233
253087241
253087254
253087262
253087275
253087283
253087308
253087329
253087337
253087340
253087358
Sagem
P/N
UHH07-C161-04-00
UHB07-D161-01-00
UHH07-D161-01-00
UHB07-D161-02-00
UHH07-D161-02-00
UHB07-D161-03-00
UHH07-D161-03-00
UHB07-D161-04-00
UHH07-D161-04-00
UHB07-E161-01-00
UHH07-E161-01-00
UHB07-E161-02-00
UHH07-E161-02-00
UHB07-E161-03-00
UHH07-E161-03-00
UHB07-E161-04-00
UHH07-E161-04-00
UHB07-F161-01-00
UHH07-F161-01-00
UHB07-F161-02-00
UHH07-F161-02-00
UHB07-F161-03-00
UHH07-F161-03-00
UHB07-F161-04-00
UHH07-F161-04-00
Sagem Model
Number
7,093.0
7,289.0
7,121.0
7,317.0
7,149.0
7,443.0
7,611.0
7,485.0
7,653.0
7,527.0
7,695.0
7,093.0
7,261.0
7,149.0
7,317.0
7,205.0
7,373.0
7,149.0
7,345.0
7,177.0
7,373.0
7,205.0
7,499.0
7,667.0
7,541.0
7,709.0
7,583.0
7,751.0
7,149.0
7,317.0
7,205.0
7,373.0
7,261.0
7,429.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,380.0
7,443.0
7,239.0
7,302.0
7,400.0
7,463.0
7,274.0
7,337.0
7,435.0
7,498.0
7,309.0
7,372.0
7,470.0
7,533.0
7,344.0
7,407.0
7,505.0
7,568.0
7,414.0
7,477.0
7,575.0
7,638.0
7,449.0
7,512.0
7,610.0
7,673.0
7,484.0
7,547.0
7,645.0
7,708.0
7,519.0
7,582.0
7,680.0
7,743.0
7,539.0
7,602.0
7,700.0
7,763.0
7,574.0
7,637.0
7,735.0
7,798.0
7,609.0
7,672.0
7,770.0
7,833.0
7,644.0
7,707.0
7,805.0
7,868.0
196
196
196
196
196
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
T to R
(MHz)
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)




Sagem Description
252957994
252958003
252958016
252958024
252958037
252958045
252958058
252958066
252958079
252958087
252958090
252958107
252958110
252958128
UHB08-A151-01-00
UHH08-A151-01-00
UHB08-A151-02-00
UHH08-A151-02-00
UHB08-A151-03-00
UHH08-A151-03-00
UHB08-A208-01-00
UHH08-A208-01-00
UHB08-A208-02-00
UHH08-A208-02-00
UHB08-A208-03-00
UHH08-A208-03-00
UHB08-A208-04-00
UHH08-A208-04-00



252957879
252957887
252957890
252957907
252957910
252957928
252957931
252957949
252957952
252957960
252957973
252957981
8 GHz ODUs

UHB08-A126-01-00
UHH08-A126-01-00
UHB08-A126-02-00
UHH08-A126-02-00
UHB08-A126-03-00
UHH08-A126-03-00
UHB08-A126-04-00
UHH08-A126-04-00
UHB08-A126-05-00
UHH08-A126-05-00
UHB08-A126-06-00
UHH08-A126-06-00
253087486
253087506
253087527
253087548
253087569
253087572
UHB07-A245-01-00
UHH07-A245-01-00
UHB07-A245-02-00
UHH07-A245-02-00
UHB07-A245-03-00
UHH07-A245-03-00

253087431
253087444
253087452
253087465
253087473
UHH07-A196-03-00
UHB07-A196-04-00
UHH07-A196-04-00
UHB07-A196-05-00
UHH07-A196-05-00
Sagem Description
UHB08-YYYY-XX-00
UHH08-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem
P/N
Sagem Model
Number
8,043.0
8,251.0
8,099.0
8,307.0
8,155.0
8,363.0
8,211.0
8,419.0
8,203.0
8,355.0
8,240.0
8,392.0
8,277.0
8,429.0
8,279.0
8,398.0
8,293.0
8,412.0
8,307.0
8,426.0
8,321.0
8,440.0
8,335.0
8,454.0
8,349.0
8,468.0
7,400.0
7,645.0
7,484.0
7,729.0
7,568.0
7,813.0
8,113.0
8,321.0
8,169.0
8,377.0
8,225.0
8,433.0
8,281.0
8,489.0
8,271.0
8,423.0
8,308.0
8,460.0
8,345.0
8,497.0
8,307.0
8,426.0
8,321.0
8,440.0
8,335.0
8,454.0
8,349.0
8,468.0
8,363.0
8,482.0
8,377.0
8,496.0
7,484.0
7,729.0
7,568.0
7,813.0
7,652.0
7,897.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,345.0
7,401.0
7,177.0
7,233.0
7,373.0
7,429.0
7,205.0
7,261.0
7,401.0
7,457.0
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
84
84
84
84
84
84
56
56
56
56
56
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-13
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
119 & 126

119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
245
245
245
245
245
245
196
196
196
196
196
T to R
(MHz)
252958173
252958181
252958194
252958206
253078990
253079009
UHB08-A311-01-00
UHH08-A311-01-00
UHB08-A311-02-00
UHH08-A311-02-00
UHB08-A311-03-00
UHH08-A311-03-00
253087580
253087593
253087600
253087613
253087642
253087655
252958318
252958321
252958339
252958342
252958350
252958363
252958371
252958384
UHB11-A490-05-00
UHH11-A490-05-00
UHB11-A490-06-00
UHH11-A490-06-00
UHB11-A490-07-00
UHH11-A490-07-00
UHB11-A530-01-00
UHH11-A530-01-00
UHB11-A530-02-00
UHH11-A530-02-00
UHB11-A530-03-00
UHH11-A530-03-00
UHB11-A530-04-00
UHH11-A530-04-00
Page A2-14

252958235
252958248
252958256
252958269
252958277
252958280
252958298
252958300
UHB11-A490-01-00
UHH11-A490-01-00
UHB11-A490-02-00
UHH11-A490-02-00
UHB11-A490-03-00
UHH11-A490-03-00
UHB11-A490-04-00
UHH11-A490-04-00
10,675.0
11,205.0
10,795.0
11,325.0
10,915.0
11,445.0
11,035.0
11,565.0
10,700.0
11,200.0
10,855.0
11,355.0
11,010.0
11,510.0
10,675.0
11,165.0
10,795.0
11,285.0
10,915.0
11,405.0
11,035.0
11,525.0
7,731.0
8,042.0
7,835.0
8,146.0
7,717.0
8,028.0
7,905.0
8,171.0
8,017.0
8,283.0
8,005.0
8,219.0
10,855.0
11,385.0
10,975.0
11,505.0
11,135.0
11,665.0
11,215.0
11,745.0
10,890.0
11,390.0
11,045.0
11,545.0
11,200.0
11,700.0
10,855.0
11,345.0
10,975.0
11,465.0
11,095.0
11,585.0
11,215.0
11,705.0
7,867.0
8,178.0
7,971.0
8,282.0
7,867.0
8,178.0
8,024.0
8,290.0
8,136.0
8,402.0
8,075.0
8,289.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
490 & 500

490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
266
266
266
266
213.5
213.5
T to R
(MHz)
180
180
180
180
220
220
180
180
190
190
190
190
190
190
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
136
136
136
136
136
136
119
119
119
119
70
70
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)


UHB11-YYYY-XX-00
UHH11-YYYY-XX-00
11 GHz ODUs


252958131
252958149
252958152
252958160
UHB08-A266-01-00
UHH08-A266-01-00
UHB08-A266-02-00
UHH08-A266-02-00
Sagem Description

Sagem
P/N
UHB08-A213-01-00
UHH08-A213-01-00
Sagem Model
Number

252958511
252958529
252958532
252958540
252958553
252958561
253351740
253351758
253351761
253351779
253351782
253351790
252958574
252958582
252958595
252958607
252958615
252958628
252958636
252958649
253087663
253087676
253087684
253087697
253087759
UHB15-A315-01-00
UHH15-A315-01-00
UHB15-A315-02-00
UHH15-A315-02-00
UHB15-A315-03-00
UHH15-A315-03-00
UHB15-A322-01-00
UHH15-A322-01-00
UHB15-A322-02-00
UHH15-A322-02-00
UHB15-A322-03-00
UHH15-A322-03-00
UHB15-A420-01-00
UHH15-A420-01-00
UHB15-A420-02-00
UHH15-A420-02-00
UHB15-A420-03-00
UHH15-A420-03-00
UHB15-A420-04-00
UHH15-A420-04-00
UHB15-A475-01-00
UHH15-A475-01-00
UHB15-A475-02-00
UHH15-A475-02-00
UHB15-A475-03-00



UHB15-YYYY-XX-00
UHH15-YYYY-XX-00
15 GHz ODUs

252958417
252958425
252958438
252958446
252958459
252958467
252958470
252958488
UHB13-A266-01-00
UHH13-A266-01-00
UHB13-A266-02-00
UHH13-A266-02-00
UHB13-A266-03-00
UHH13-A266-03-00
UHB13-A266-04-00
UHH13-A266-04-00
13 GHz ODUs
Sagem Description
Sagem
P/N
UHB13-YYYY-XX-00
UHH13-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem Model
Number
14,500.0
14,975.0
14,660.0
15,135.0
14,783.0
14,501.0
14,921.0
14,606.0
15,026.0
14,718.0
15,138.0
14,816.0
15,236.0
14,627.0
14,942.0
14,725.0
15,040.0
14,823.0
15,138.0
14,627.0
14,942.0
14,725.0
15,040.0
14,823.0
15,138.0
12,751.0
13,017.0
12,807.0
13,073.0
12,863.0
13,129.0
12,919.0
13,185.0
14,668.0
15,143.0
14,828.0
15,303.0
14,883.0
14,613.0
15,033.0
14,725.0
15,145.0
14,837.0
15,257.0
14,928.0
15,348.0
14,746.0
15,061.0
14,844.0
15,159.0
14,942.0
15,257.0
14,746.0
15,061.0
14,844.0
15,159.0
14,942.0
15,257.0
12,814.0
13,080.0
12,870.0
13,136.0
12,926.0
13,192.0
12,982.0
13,248.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
168
168
168
168
100
112
112
119
119
119
119
112
112
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-15
475
475
475
475
475
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
322
322
322
322
322
322
315
315
315
315
315
315
266
266
266
266
266
266
266
266
T to R
(MHz)
Sagem Description
252951187
252951195
252951314
252951088
252951091
252951405
UHB18-1560-01-00
UHH18-1560-01-00
UHB18-1560-02-00
UHH18-1560-02-00
UHB18-1560-03-00
UHH18-1560-03-00
Page A2-16

252951038
252951046
252951111
252951132
252951145
252951153
252951166
252951174
UHB18-1010-01-00
UHH18-1010-01-00
UHB18-1010-02-00
UHH18-1010-02-00
UHB18-1010-03-00
UHH18-1010-03-00
UHB18-1010-04-00
UHH18-1010-04-00
14,512.0
15,156.0
14,610.0
15,254.0
14,708.0
15,352.0
14,610.0
15,250.0
14,715.0
15,355.0
14,522.0
15,012.0
14,634.0
15,124.0
14,746.0
15,236.0
14,858.0
15,348.0
17,700.0
19,260.0
17,840.0
19,400.0
17,700.0
19,260.0
17,685.0
18,695.0
17,930.0
18,940.0
18,180.0
19,190.0
18,400.0
19,410.0
18,000.0
19,560.0
18,140.0
19,700.0
18,140.0
19,700.0
17,985.0
18,995.0
18,230.0
19,240.0
18,480.0
19,490.0
18,700.0
19,710.0
14,500.0 14,615.0
15,228.0 15,343.0
14,400.0
15,044.0
14,498.0
15,142.0
14,596.0
15,240.0
14,500.0
15,140.0
14,605.0
15,245.0
14,403.0
14,893.0
14,515.0
15,005.0
14,627.0
15,117.0
14,739.0
15,229.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
15,258.0 15,358.0
1560
1560
1560
1560
1560
1560
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
728
728
644
644
644
644
644
644
640
640
640
640
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
475
T to R
(MHz)
300
300
300
300
440
440
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
115
115
112
112
112
112
112
112
110
110
110
110
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
100
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)

UHB18-YYYY-XX-00
UHH18-YYYY-XX-00
18 GHz ODUs

UHB15-A728-01-00
UHH15-A728-01-00


252958730
252958743
252958751
252958764
252958772
252958785
253087770
253087783
253087791
253087803
UHB15-A640-01-00
UHH15-A640-01-00
UHB15-A640-02-00
UHH15-A640-02-00

UHB15-A644-01-00
UHH15-A644-01-00
UHB15-A644-02-00
UHH15-A644-02-00
UHB15-A644-03-00
UHH15-A644-03-00
252958657
252958660
252958678
252958681
252958699
252958701
252958719
252958722
Sagem
P/N
UHB15-A490-01-00
UHH15-A490-01-00
UHB15-A490-02-00
UHH15-A490-02-00
UHB15-A490-03-00
UHH15-A490-03-00
UHB15-A490-04-00
UHH15-A490-04-00
UHH15-A475-03-00
Sagem Model
Number
253087845
253087853
253087866
253087874
253087887
253087952
252958954
252958962
252958975
252958983
252958996
252959005
252959018
252959026
UHB23-1200-05-00
UHH23-1200-05-00
UHB23-1200-06-00
UHH23-1200-06-00
UHB23-1200-07-00
UHH23-1200-07-00
UHB23-1232-01-00
UHH23-1232-01-00
UHB23-1232-02-00
UHH23-1232-02-00
UHB23-1232-03-00
UHH23-1232-03-00
UHB23-1232-04-00
UHH23-1232-04-00
252959071 ODU SLH 26GHZ TR 1008 LO B1

252959089 ODU SLH 26GHZ TR 1008 HI B1
252959092 ODU SLH 26GHZ TR 1008 LO B2
UHB26-1008-01-00
UHH26-1008-01-00
UHB26-1008-02-00

26 GHz ODUs


UHB26-A800-01-00
UHH26-A800-01-00
UHB26-YYYY-XX-00
UHH26-YYYY-XX-00
252958871
252958889
252958892
252958909
252958912
252958920
252958933
252958941
UHB23-1200-01-00
UHH23-1200-01-00
UHB23-1200-02-00
UHH23-1200-02-00
UHB23-1200-03-00
UHH23-1200-03-00
UHB23-1200-04-00
UHH23-1200-04-00


252958839
252958847
252958850
252958868
UHB23-1008-01-00
UHH23-1008-01-00
UHB23-1008-02-00
UHH23-1008-02-00
23 GHz ODUs
Sagem Description
Sagem
P/N
UHB23-YYYY-XX-00
UHH23-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem Model
Number
21,500.0
22,732.0
21,786.0
23,018.0
22,093.0
23,325.0
22,386.0
23,618.0
21,600.0
22,800.0
22,000.0
23,200.0
22,400.0
23,600.0
21,530.0
22,730.0
21,820.0
23,020.0
22,110.0
23,310.0
22,400.0
23,600.0
22,330.0
23,338.0
22,610.0
23,618.0
24,549.0 24,885.0
25,557.0 25,893.0
24,829.0 25,165.0
24,250.0 24,450.0
25,050.0 25,250.0
21,200.0
22,432.0
21,472.0
22,704.0
21,779.0
23,011.0
22,086.0
23,318.0
21,200.0
22,400.0
21,600.0
22,800.0
22,000.0
23,200.0
21,200.0
22,400.0
21,490.0
22,690.0
21,780.0
22,980.0
22,070.0
23,270.0
21,994.0
23,002.0
22,274.0
23,282.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
336
336
336
Page A2-17
1008
1008
1008
200
200
300
300
314
314
314
314
300
300
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
800
800
400
400
400
400
400
400
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
336
336
336
336
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
1008
1008
1008
1008
T to R
(MHz)
Sagem Description
Page A2-18
UHB38-1260-01-00
UHH38-1260-01-00
UHB38-1260-02-00
UHH38-1260-02-00
252959216
252959229
252959237
252959240
37,044.0
38,304.0
37,604.0
38,864.0
38,595.0
39,295.0
38,795.0
39,495.0
38,995.0
39,695.0
39,195.0
39,895.0
31,815.0
32,627.0
32,179.0
32,991.0
37,632.0
38,892.0
38,192.0
39,452.0
38,805.0
39,505.0
39,005.0
39,705.0
39,205.0
39,905.0
39,405.0
40,105.0
32,207.0
33,019.0
32,571.0
33,383.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
25,837.0 26,173.0
25,109.0 25,445.0
26,117.0 26,453.0
1260
1260
1260
1260
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
812
812
812
812
1008
1008
1008
T to R
(MHz)
588
588
588
588
210
210
210
210
210
210
210
210
392
392
392
392
336
336
336
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)


UHB38-A700-01-00
UHH38-A700-01-00
UHB38-A700-02-00
UHH38-A700-02-00
UHB38-A700-03-00
UHH38-A700-03-00
UHB38-A700-04-00
UHH38-A700-04-00
253087960
253087981
253088003
253088024
253088037
253088045
253088058
253088066
UHB38-YYYY-XX-00
UHH38-YYYY-XX-00
38 GHz ODUs

UHB32-A812-01-00
UHH32-A812-01-00
UHB32-A812-02-00
UHH32-A812-02-00
252959154
252959167
252959175
252959188
32 GHz ODUs
252959104 ODU SLH 26GHZ TR 1008 HI B2

252959112 ODU SLH 26GHZ TR 1008 LO B3
252959125 ODU SLH 26GHZ TR 1008 HI B3
Sagem
P/N
UHB32-YYYY-XX-00
UHH32-YYYY-XX-00
UHH26-1008-02-00
UHB26-1008-03-00
UHH26-1008-03-00
Sagem Model
Number
253366001
253366022
253366064
253366085
253366093
253366105
253366118
253366126
253366139
253366147
253366150
253366168
253366192
253366212
253366663
253366770
253366783
253366791
253366803
253366824
253367045
253367053
253367066
253367074
253367095
CNB07-B154-01-00
CNH07-B154-01-00
CNB07-B154-02-00
CNH07-B154-02-00
CNB07-B154-03-00
CNH07-B154-03-00
CNB07-C154-01-00
CNH07-C154-01-00
CNB07-C154-02-00
CNH07-C154-02-00
CNB07-C154-03-00
CNH07-C154-03-00
CNB07-C154-04-00
CNH07-C154-04-00
CNB07-A160-01-00
CNH07-A160-01-00
CNB07-A160-02-00
CNH07-A160-02-00
CNB07-A160-03-00
CNH07-A160-03-00
CNB07-A161-01-00
CNH07-A161-01-00
CNB07-A161-02-00
CNH07-A161-02-00
CNB07-A161-03-00
ODU SLF 07GHZ TR A161 LO B1

ODU SLF 07GHZ TR A161 HI B1

ODU SLF 07GHZ TR C154 HI B4
ODU SLF 07GHZ TR C154 LO B1

ODU SLF 07GHZ TR B154 LO B1

ODU SLF 07GHZ TR B154 HI B1

253365864
253365926
253365947
253365955
253365968
253365976
CNB07-A154-01-00
CNH07-A154-01-00
CNB07-A154-02-00
CNH07-A154-02-00
CNB07-A154-03-00
CNH07-A154-03-00
ODU SLF 07GHZ TR YYYY LO XX
7 GHz ODUs
Sagem Description
ODU SLF 07GHZ TR YYYY HI XX
Sagem
P/N
CNB07-YYYY-XX-00
CNH07-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem Model
Number
7,198.0
7,352.0
7,226.0
7,380.0
7,254.0
7,408.0
7,282.0
7,436.0
7,135.0
7,289.0
7,163.0
7,317.0
7,191.0
7,345.0
7,219.0
7,373.0
7,117.0
7,278.0
7,159.0
7,320.0
7,198.0
7,180.0
7,341.0
7,222.0
7,383.0
7,261.0
7,496.5
7,656.5
7,541.5
7,701.5
7,589.0
7,749.0
7,184.0
7,338.0
7,226.0
7,380.0
7,268.0
7,422.0
7,128.0
7,282.0
7,170.0
7,324.0
7,212.0
7,366.0
7,433.5
7,593.5
7,478.5
7,638.5
7,526.0
7,686.0
7,484.0
7,638.0
7,526.0
7,680.0
7,568.0
7,722.0
7,428.0
7,582.0
7,470.0
7,624.0
7,512.0
7,666.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-19
161
161
161
161
161
160
160
160
160
160
160
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
154
T to R
(MHz)
References of ODUs NL
Page A2-20
7,443.0
7,499.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,359.0
7,422.0
7,213.0
7,276.0
7,374.0
7,437.0
7,417.0
7,480.0
7,578.0
7,641.0
7,459.0
7,522.0
7,620.0
7,683.0
7,498.0
7,561.0
7,659.0
7,722.0
7,513.0
7,576.0
7,674.0
7,737.0
7,114.0
7,177.0
7,275.0
7,338.0
7,149.0
7,212.0
7,310.0
7,373.0
7,184.0
7,247.0
7,345.0
7,408.0
7,219.0
7,282.0
7,380.0
7,443.0
7,239.0
7,302.0
7,400.0
7,463.0
7,274.0
7,337.0
7,435.0
7,498.0
7,309.0
7,372.0
7,470.0
7,533.0
7,344.0
7,407.0
7,505.0
7,568.0
7,414.0
7,477.0
7,575.0
7,638.0
7,449.0
7,512.0
7,610.0
7,673.0
7,484.0
7,547.0
7,645.0
7,708.0
7,519.0
7,582.0
7,680.0
7,743.0
7,539.0
7,602.0
7,700.0
7,763.0
7,574.0
7,637.0
7,735.0
7,798.0
7,609.0
7,672.0
7,770.0
7,833.0
7,644.0
7,707.0
7,805.0
7,868.0
168
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
T to R
(MHz)
56
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
253367847 ODU SLF 07GHZ TR A168 LO B1
CNB07-A168-01-00

ODU SLF 07GHZ TR D161 LO B1
ODU SLF 07GHZ TR D161 HI B1
ODU SLF 07GHZ TR E161 LO B1
ODU SLF 07GHZ TR E161 HI B1
ODU SLF 07GHZ TR F161 LO B1
ODU SLF 07GHZ TR F161 HI B1
Sagem Description
253367110
253367128
253367131
253367149
253367152
253367160
253367173
253367181
253367194
253367201
253367214
253367222
253367235
253367243
253367256
253367412
253367425
253367433
253367446
253367454
253367467
253367475
253367488
253367496
253367532
253367553
253367574
253367602
253367615
253367644
253367657
253367678
253367686
253367699
253367701
253367730
253367743
253367764
253367772
253367793
253367805
253367826
253367834
Sagem
P/N
CNH07-A161-03-00
CNB07-A161-04-00
CNH07-A161-04-00
CNB07-B161-01-00
CNH07-B161-01-00
CNB07-B161-02-00
CNH07-B161-02-00
CNB07-B161-03-00
CNH07-B161-03-00
CNB07-B161-04-00
CNH07-B161-04-00
CNB07-C161-01-00
CNH07-C161-01-00
CNB07-C161-02-00
CNH07-C161-02-00
CNB07-C161-03-00
CNH07-C161-03-00
CNB07-C161-04-00
CNH07-C161-04-00
CNB07-D161-01-00
CNH07-D161-01-00
CNB07-D161-02-00
CNH07-D161-02-00
CNB07-D161-03-00
CNH07-D161-03-00
CNB07-D161-04-00
CNH07-D161-04-00
CNB07-E161-01-00
CNH07-E161-01-00
CNB07-E161-02-00
CNH07-E161-02-00
CNB07-E161-03-00
CNH07-E161-03-00
CNB07-E161-04-00
CNH07-E161-04-00
CNB07-F161-01-00
CNH07-F161-01-00
CNB07-F161-02-00
CNH07-F161-02-00
CNB07-F161-03-00
CNH07-F161-03-00
CNB07-F161-04-00
CNH07-F161-04-00
Sagem Model
Number
8 GHz ODUs



253368071
253368089
253368092
253368109
253368112
253368120
CNB07-A245-01-00
CNH07-A245-01-00
CNB07-A245-02-00
CNH07-A245-02-00
CNB07-A245-03-00
CNH07-A245-03-00
253368472
253368480
253368493
253368500
253368521
253368534
253368563
253368576
253368584
253368609
253367975
253367983
253367996
253368005
253368018
253368026
253368039
253368047
253368050
253368068
CNB07-A196-01-00
CNH07-A196-01-00
CNB07-A196-02-00
CNH07-A196-02-00
CNB07-A196-03-00
CNH07-A196-03-00
CNB07-A196-04-00
CNH07-A196-04-00
CNB07-A196-05-00
CNH07-A196-05-00

CNB08-A126-01-00
CNH08-A126-01-00
CNB08-A126-02-00
CNH08-A126-02-00
CNB08-A126-03-00
CNH08-A126-03-00
CNB08-A126-04-00
CNH08-A126-04-00
CNB08-A126-05-00
CNH08-A126-05-00
253367912
253367920
253367933
253367941
253367954
253367962
UHB07-B168-01-00
UHH07-B168-01-00
UHB07-B168-02-00
UHH07-B168-02-00
UHB07-B168-03-00
UHH07-B168-03-00

253367855
253367868
253367876
253367889
253367909
CNH07-A168-01-00
CNB07-A168-02-00
CNH07-A168-02-00
CNB07-A168-03-00
CNH07-A168-03-00
Sagem Description
CNB08-YYYY-XX-00
CNH08-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem
P/N
Sagem Model
Number
8,279.0
8,398.0
8,293.0
8,412.0
8,307.0
8,426.0
8,321.0
8,440.0
8,335.0
8,454.0
7,400.0
7,645.0
7,484.0
7,729.0
7,568.0
7,813.0
7,093.0
7,289.0
7,121.0
7,317.0
7,149.0
7,345.0
7,177.0
7,373.0
7,205.0
7,401.0
7,093.0
7,261.0
7,149.0
7,317.0
7,205.0
7,373.0
8,307.0
8,426.0
8,321.0
8,440.0
8,335.0
8,454.0
8,349.0
8,468.0
8,363.0
8,482.0
7,484.0
7,729.0
7,568.0
7,813.0
7,652.0
7,897.0
7,149.0
7,345.0
7,177.0
7,373.0
7,205.0
7,401.0
7,233.0
7,429.0
7,261.0
7,457.0
7,149.0
7,317.0
7,205.0
7,373.0
7,261.0
7,429.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,611.0
7,667.0
7,485.0
7,541.0
7,653.0
7,709.0
7,527.0
7,583.0
7,695.0
7,751.0
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
84
84
84
84
84
84
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-21
119 & 126

119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
245
245
245
245
245
245
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
T to R
(MHz)

253368849 ODU SLF 08GHZ TR A213 HI B1
253368860
253368873
253368881
253368894
253368901
253368914
253368922
253368935
253368943
253368956
CNB08-A213-01-00
CNH08-A213-01-00
CNB08-A266-01-00
CNH08-A266-01-00
CNB08-A266-02-00
CNH08-A266-02-00
CNB08-A311-01-00
CNH08-A311-01-00
CNB08-A311-02-00
CNH08-A311-02-00
CNB08-A311-03-00
CNH08-A311-03-00
10,675.0
11,165.0
10,795.0
11,285.0
10,915.0
11,405.0
11,035.0
7,731.0
8,042.0
7,835.0
8,146.0
7,717.0
8,028.0
7,905.0
8,171.0
8,017.0
8,283.0
8,005.0
8,219.0
8,043.0
8,251.0
8,099.0
8,307.0
8,155.0
8,363.0
8,211.0
8,419.0
8,203.0
8,355.0
8,240.0
8,392.0
8,277.0
8,429.0
10,855.0
11,345.0
10,975.0
11,465.0
11,095.0
11,585.0
11,215.0
7,867.0
8,178.0
7,971.0
8,282.0
7,867.0
8,178.0
8,024.0
8,290.0
8,136.0
8,402.0
8,075.0
8,289.0
8,113.0
8,321.0
8,169.0
8,377.0
8,225.0
8,433.0
8,281.0
8,489.0
8,271.0
8,423.0
8,308.0
8,460.0
8,345.0
8,497.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
8,349.0
8,377.0
8,468.0
8,496.0
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
266
266
266
266
213.5
213.5
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
119 & 126

119 & 126
T to R
(MHz)
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
136
136
136
136
136
136
119
119
119
119
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
28
28
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)

CNB11-A490-01-00
CNH11-A490-01-00
CNB11-A490-02-00
CNH11-A490-02-00
CNB11-A490-03-00
CNH11-A490-03-00
CNB11-A490-04-00
Page A2-22
11 GHz ODUs



CNB11-YYYY-XX-00
CNH11-YYYY-XX-00
253368964
253368977
253368985
253369010
253369031
253369049
253369052
253368711
253368724
253368732
253368753
253368766
253368795
253368807
253368810
CNB08-A208-01-00
CNH08-A208-01-00
CNB08-A208-02-00
CNH08-A208-02-00
CNB08-A208-03-00
CNH08-A208-03-00
CNB08-A208-04-00
CNH08-A208-04-00

253368638
253368659
253368670
253368683
253368691
253368703
CNB08-A151-01-00
CNH08-A151-01-00
CNB08-A151-02-00
CNH08-A151-02-00
CNB08-A151-03-00
CNH08-A151-03-00
Sagem Description

Sagem
P/N
CNB08-A126-06-00
CNH08-A126-06-00
Sagem Model
Number

CNB13-A266-01-00
CNH13-A266-01-00
CNB13-A266-02-00
CNH13-A266-02-00
CNB13-A266-03-00
CNH13-A266-03-00
CNB13-A266-04-00
CNH13-A266-04-00

253374793
253374805
253374813
253374826
253374834
253374847

CNB15-A315-01-00
CNH15-A315-01-00
CNB15-A315-02-00
CNH15-A315-02-00
CNB15-A315-03-00
CNH15-A315-03-00
CNB15-A420-01-00
CNH15-A420-01-00
CNB15-A420-02-00
CNB15-YYYY-XX-00
CNH15-YYYY-XX-00
15 GHz ODUs
13 GHz ODUs
CNB13-YYYY-XX-00
CNH13-YYYY-XX-00
253374719
253374727
253374730
253374748
253374751
253374769
253374772
253374780
253374636
253374644
253374657
253374665
253374678
253374686
253374699
253374706
CNB11-A530-01-00
CNH11-A530-01-00
CNB11-A530-02-00
CNH11-A530-02-00
CNB11-A530-03-00
CNH11-A530-03-00
CNB11-A530-04-00
CNH11-A530-04-00


253374326
253374339
253374347
253374350
253374368
253374623
CNB11-A490-05-00
CNH11-A490-05-00
CNB11-A490-06-00
CNH11-A490-06-00
CNB11-A490-07-00
CNH11-A490-07-00
Sagem Description
Sagem
P/N
CNH11-A490-04-00
Sagem Model
Number
14501
14921
14606
14,627.0
14,942.0
14,725.0
15,040.0
14,823.0
15,138.0
12,751.0
13,017.0
12,807.0
13,073.0
12,863.0
13,129.0
12,919.0
13,185.0
10,675.0
11,205.0
10,795.0
11,325.0
10,915.0
11,445.0
11,035.0
11,565.0
10,700.0
11,200.0
10,855.0
11,355.0
11,010.0
11,510.0
14613
15033
14725
14,746.0
15,061.0
14,844.0
15,159.0
14,942.0
15,257.0
12,814.0
13,080.0
12,870.0
13,136.0
12,926.0
13,192.0
12,982.0
13,248.0
10,855.0
11,385.0
10,975.0
11,505.0
11,135.0
11,665.0
11,215.0
11,745.0
10,890.0
11,390.0
11,045.0
11,545.0
11,200.0
11,700.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
11,525.0 11,705.0
112
112
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
180
180
180
180
220
220
180
180
190
190
190
190
190
190
180
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-23
420
420
420
315
315
315
315
315
315
266
266
266
266
266
266
266
266
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
490 & 500

490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490
T to R
(MHz)
253374991
253375005
253375013
253375026
253375034
253375047
253375055
253375068
253375076
253375089
253375097
253375109
253375112
253375120
253375133
253375141
253375154
253375162
CNB15-A490-01-00
CNH15-A490-01-00
CNB15-A490-02-00
CNH15-A490-02-00
CNB15-A490-03-00
CNH15-A490-03-00
CNB15-A490-04-00
CNH15-A490-04-00
CNB15-A640-01-00
CNH15-A640-01-00
CNB15-A640-02-00
CNH15-A640-02-00
CNB15-A644-01-00
CNH15-A644-01-00
CNB15-A644-02-00
CNH15-A644-02-00
CNB15-A644-03-00
CNH15-A644-03-00





Sagem Description
Page A2-24
17,685.0
18,695.0
17,930.0
18,940.0
14500
15228
14400
15044
14498
15142
14596
15240
14,500.0
15,140.0
14,605.0
15,245.0
14403
14893
14515
15005
14627
15117
14739
15229
14,500.0
14,975.0
14,660.0
15,135.0
14,783.0
15,258.0
17,985.0
18,995.0
18,230.0
19,240.0
14615
15343
14512
15156
14610
15254
14708
15352
14,610.0
15,250.0
14,715.0
15,355.0
14522
15012
14634
15124
14746
15236
14858
15348
14,668.0
15,143.0
14,828.0
15,303.0
14,883.0
15,358.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
15026
15145
14718
14837
15138
15257
14816
14928
15236
15348
1010
1010
1010
1010
300
300
300
300
115
115
112
112
112
112
112
112
644
644
644
644
644
644
728
728
110
110
110
110
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
168
168
168
168
100
100
119
119
119
112
112
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
640
640
640
640
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
475
475
475
475
475
475
420
420
420
420
420
T to R
(MHz)
ODU SLF 18GHZ TR 1010 LO B1

ODU SLF 18GHZ TR 1010 HI B1
CNB18-1010-01-00
CNH18-1010-01-00
CNB18-1010-02-00
CNH18-1010-02-00
253378824
253378837
253378845
253378858
CNB18-YYYY-XX-00
CNH18-YYYY-XX-00
18 GHz ODUs

253374938
253374941
253374959
253374962
253374970
253374983
CNB15-A475-01-00
CNH15-A475-01-00
CNB15-A475-02-00
CNH15-A475-02-00
CNB15-A475-03-00
CNH15-A475-03-00
CNB15-A728-01-00
CNH15-A728-01-00
253374889
253374897
253374909
253374917
253374920
Sagem
P/N
CNH15-A420-02-00
CNB15-A420-03-00
CNH15-A420-03-00
CNB15-A420-04-00
CNH15-A420-04-00
Sagem Model
Number
253375237
253375245
253375258
253375266
253375279
253375287
253375290
253375302
253375310
253375323
253375331
253375344
253375352
253375365
253375373
253375386
253375394
253375406
253375414
253375427
253375435
253375448
CNB23-1200-01-00
CNH23-1200-01-00
CNB23-1200-02-00
CNH23-1200-02-00
CNB23-1200-03-00
CNH23-1200-03-00
CNB23-1200-04-00
CNH23-1200-04-00
CNB23-1200-05-00
CNH23-1200-05-00
CNB23-1200-06-00
CNH23-1200-06-00
CNB23-1200-07-00
CNH23-1200-07-00
CNB23-1232-01-00
CNH23-1232-01-00
CNB23-1232-02-00
CNH23-1232-02-00
CNB23-1232-03-00
CNH23-1232-03-00
CNB23-1232-04-00
CNH23-1232-04-00




253375196
253375203
253375216
253375224
23 GHz ODUs

CNB23-1008-01-00
CNH23-1008-01-00
CNB23-1008-02-00
CNH23-1008-02-00
253378907
253378910
253378928
253378931
253378949
253378952
CNB18-1560-01-00
CNH18-1560-01-00
CNB18-1560-02-00
CNH18-1560-02-00
CNB18-1560-03-00
CNH18-1560-03-00

253378866
253378879
253378887
253378890
CNB18-1010-03-00
CNH18-1010-03-00
CNB18-1010-04-00
CNH18-1010-04-00
Sagem Description
CNB23-YYYY-XX-00
CNH23-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem
P/N
Sagem Model
Number
21,200.0
22,432.0
21,472.0
22,704.0
21,779.0
23,011.0
22,086.0
23,318.0
21,200.0
22,400.0
21,600.0
22,800.0
22,000.0
23,200.0
21,200.0
22,400.0
21,490.0
22,690.0
21,780.0
22,980.0
22,070.0
23,270.0
21,994.0
23,002.0
22,274.0
23,282.0
17,700.0
19,260.0
17,840.0
19,400.0
17,700.0
19,260.0
21,500.0
22,732.0
21,786.0
23,018.0
22,093.0
23,325.0
22,386.0
23,618.0
21,600.0
22,800.0
22,000.0
23,200.0
22,400.0
23,600.0
21,530.0
22,730.0
21,820.0
23,020.0
22,110.0
23,310.0
22,400.0
23,600.0
22,330.0
23,338.0
22,610.0
23,618.0
18,000.0
19,560.0
18,140.0
19,700.0
18,140.0
19,700.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
18,180.0 18,480.0
19,190.0 19,490.0
18,400.0 18,700.0
19,410.0 19,710.0
300
300
314
314
314
314
300
300
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
Page A2-25
400
400
400
400
400
400
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
336
336
336
336
300
300
300
300
440
440
300
300
300
300
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
1008
1008
1008
1008
1560
1560
1560
1560
1560
1560
1010
1010
1010
1010
T to R
(MHz)
Page A2-26
CNB38-1260-01-00
CNH38-1260-01-00
CNB38-1260-02-00
CNH38-1260-02-00
253375659
253375670
253375667
253375688
37,044.0
38,304.0
37,604.0
38,864.0
38,595.0
39,295.0
38,795.0
39,495.0
38,995.0
39,695.0
39,195.0
39,895.0
31,815.0
32,627.0
32,179.0
32,991.0
24,549.0
25,557.0
24,829.0
25,837.0
25,109.0
26,117.0
37,632.0
38,892.0
38,192.0
39,452.0
38,805.0
39,505.0
39,005.0
39,705.0
39,205.0
39,905.0
39,405.0
40,105.0
32,207.0
33,019.0
32,571.0
33,383.0
24,885.0
25,893.0
25,165.0
26,173.0
25,445.0
26,453.0
24,250.0 24,450.0
25,050.0 25,250.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
1260
1260
1260
1260
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
812
812
812
812
1008
1008
1008
1008
1008
1008
800
800
T to R
(MHz)
588
588
588
588
210
210
210
210
210
210
210
210
392
392
392
392
336
336
336
336
336
336
200
200
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)


CNB38-A700-01-00
CNH38-A700-01-00
CNB38-A700-02-00
CNH38-A700-02-00
CNB38-A700-03-00
CNH38-A700-03-00
CNB38-A700-04-00
CNH38-A700-04-00
253375576
253375584
253375597
253375604
253375617
253375625
253375638
253375646
CNB38-YYYY-XX-00
CNH38-YYYY-XX-00
38 GHz ODUs

CNB32-A812-01-00
CNH32-A812-01-00
CNB32-A812-02-00
CNH32-A812-02-00
253375534
253375542
253375555
253375563
CNB32-YYYY-XX-00
CNH32-YYYY-XX-00
32 GHz ODUs

253375477
253375480
253375498
253375500
253375513
253375521
CNB26-1008-01-00
CNH26-1008-01-00
CNB26-1008-02-00
CNH26-1008-02-00
CNB26-1008-03-00
CNH26-1008-03-00
26 GHz ODUs
Sagem Description

Sagem
P/N
CNB26-A800-01-00
CNH26-A800-01-00
CNB26-YYYY-XX-00
CNH26-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem Model
Number
251305943
251305951
251305964
251305972
251305985
251305993
251306804
251306825
251306838
251306846
251306859
251306867
251306870
251306888
251307210
251307228
251307231
251307249
251307252
251307260
251307273
251307281
253084828
253084836
253084849
253084857
UFB07-A160-01-00
UFH07-A160-01-00
UFB07-A160-02-00
UFH07-A160-02-00
UFB07-A160-03-00
UFH07-A160-03-00
UFB07-A161-01-00
UFH07-A161-01-00
UFB07-A161-02-00
UFH07-A161-02-00
UFB07-A161-03-00
UFH07-A161-03-00
UFB07-A161-04-00
UFH07-A161-04-00
UFB07-B161-01-00
UFH07-B161-01-00
UFB07-B161-02-00
UFH07-B161-02-00
UFB07-B161-03-00
UFH07-B161-03-00
UFB07-B161-04-00
UFH07-B161-04-00
UFB07-C161-01-00
UFH07-C161-01-00
UFB07-C161-02-00
UFH07-C161-02-00



251307294
251307400
251307418
251307421
251307439
251307442
UFB07-A154-01-00
UFH07-A154-01-00
UFB07-A154-02-00
UFH07-A154-02-00
UFB07-A154-03-00
UFH07-A154-03-00
7 GHz ODUs
Sagem Description
Sagem
P/N
UFB07-YYYY-XX-00
UFH07-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem Model
Number
It does not offer the ACM feature.
7,117.0
7,278.0
7,159.0
7,320.0
7,198.0
7,359.0
7,213.0
7,374.0
7,417.0
7,578.0
7,459.0
7,620.0
7,498.0
7,659.0
7,513.0
7,674.0
7,114.0
7,275.0
7,149.0
7,310.0
7,433.5
7,593.5
7,478.5
7,638.5
7,526.0
7,686.0
7,428.0
7,582.0
7,470.0
7,624.0
7,512.0
7,666.0
7,180.0
7,341.0
7,222.0
7,383.0
7,261.0
7,422.0
7,276.0
7,437.0
7,480.0
7,641.0
7,522.0
7,683.0
7,561.0
7,722.0
7,576.0
7,737.0
7,177.0
7,338.0
7,212.0
7,373.0
7,496.5
7,656.5
7,541.5
7,701.5
7,589.0
7,749.0
7,484.0
7,638.0
7,526.0
7,680.0
7,568.0
7,722.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
56
56
56
56
56
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-27
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
160
160
160
160
160
160
154
154
154
154
154
154
T to R
(MHz)
References of ODUs N
252832452
252832460
252832473
252832481
252832494
252832600
253085172
253085185
253085193
253085205
253085218
253085239
253085247
253085250
253085268
UFB07-A168-01-00
UFH07-A168-01-00
UFB07-A168-02-00
UFH07-A168-02-00
UFB07-A168-03-00
UFH07-A168-03-00
UFB07-A196-01-00
UFH07-A196-01-00
UFB07-A196-02-00
UFH07-A196-02-00
UFB07-A196-03-00
UFH07-A196-03-00
UFB07-A196-04-00
UFH07-A196-04-00
UFB07-A196-05-00
Page A2-28
253084860
253084878
253084881
253084899
253084901
253084919
253084930
253084943
253084951
253084964
253084972
253084985
253084993
253085007
253085015
253085028
253085049
253085057
253085060
253085078
253085081
253085099
253085101
253085119
253085122
253085130
253085143
253085151
Sagem
P/N
UFB07-C161-03-00
UFH07-C161-03-00
UFB07-C161-04-00
UFH07-C161-04-00
UFB07-D161-01-00
UFH07-D161-01-00
UFB07-D161-02-00
UFH07-D161-02-00
UFB07-D161-03-00
UFH07-D161-03-00
UFB07-D161-04-00
UFH07-D161-04-00
UFB07-E161-01-00
UFH07-E161-01-00
UFB07-E161-02-00
UFH07-E161-02-00
UFB07-E161-03-00
UFH07-E161-03-00
UFB07-E161-04-00
UFH07-E161-04-00
UFB07-F161-01-00
UFH07-F161-01-00
UFB07-F161-02-00
UFH07-F161-02-00
UFB07-F161-03-00
UFH07-F161-03-00
UFB07-F161-04-00
UFH07-F161-04-00
Sagem Model
Number
7,093.0
7,289.0
7,121.0
7,317.0
7,149.0
7,345.0
7,177.0
7,373.0
7,205.0
7,443.0
7,611.0
7,485.0
7,653.0
7,527.0
7,695.0
7,149.0
7,345.0
7,177.0
7,373.0
7,205.0
7,401.0
7,233.0
7,429.0
7,261.0
7,499.0
7,667.0
7,541.0
7,709.0
7,583.0
7,751.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,184.0
7,247.0
7,345.0
7,408.0
7,219.0
7,282.0
7,380.0
7,443.0
7,239.0
7,302.0
7,400.0
7,463.0
7,274.0
7,337.0
7,435.0
7,498.0
7,309.0
7,372.0
7,470.0
7,533.0
7,344.0
7,407.0
7,505.0
7,568.0
7,414.0
7,477.0
7,575.0
7,638.0
7,449.0
7,512.0
7,610.0
7,673.0
7,484.0
7,547.0
7,645.0
7,708.0
7,519.0
7,582.0
7,680.0
7,743.0
7,539.0
7,602.0
7,700.0
7,763.0
7,574.0
7,637.0
7,735.0
7,798.0
7,609.0
7,672.0
7,770.0
7,833.0
7,644.0
7,707.0
7,805.0
7,868.0
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
168
168
168
168
168
168
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
T to R
(MHz)
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)



Sagem Description

251308147
251308155
251308168
251308176
251308189
251308197
251610831
251610865
251610873
251610886
251610894
251610951
252550307
252550315
252550328
252550357
252550378
252550399
251307450
251307913
251307926
251307934
251307947
251307955
251745379
251745387

UFB08-A126-01-00
UFH08-A126-01-00
UFB08-A126-02-00
UFH08-A126-02-00
UFB08-A126-03-00
UFH08-A126-03-00
UFB08-A126-04-00
UFH08-A126-04-00
UFB08-A126-05-00
UFH08-A126-05-00
UFB08-A126-06-00
UFH08-A126-06-00
UFB08-A151-01-00
UFH08-A151-01-00
UFB08-A151-02-00
UFH08-A151-02-00
UFB08-A151-03-00
UFH08-A151-03-00
UFB08-A208-01-00
UFH08-A208-01-00
UFB08-A208-02-00
UFH08-A208-02-00
UFB08-A208-03-00
UFH08-A208-03-00
UFB08-A208-04-00
UFH08-A208-04-00
UFB08-A213-01-00
UFH08-A213-01-00


UFB08-YYYY-XX-00
UFH08-YYYY-XX-00
8 GHz ODUs

253085292
253085312
253085320
253085333
253085354
253085362
UFB07-A245-01-00
UFH07-A245-01-00
UFB07-A245-02-00
UFH07-A245-02-00
UFB07-A245-03-00
UFH07-A245-03-00
Sagem Description
Sagem
P/N
UFH07-A196-05-00
Sagem Model
Number
8,005.0
8,219.0
8,043.0
8,251.0
8,099.0
8,307.0
8,155.0
8,363.0
8,211.0
8,419.0
8,203.0
8,355.0
8,240.0
8,392.0
8,277.0
8,429.0
8,279.0
8,398.0
8,293.0
8,412.0
8,307.0
8,426.0
8,321.0
8,440.0
8,335.0
8,454.0
8,349.0
8,468.0
7,400.0
7,645.0
7,484.0
7,729.0
7,568.0
7,813.0
8,075.0
8,289.0
8,113.0
8,321.0
8,169.0
8,377.0
8,225.0
8,433.0
8,281.0
8,489.0
8,271.0
8,423.0
8,308.0
8,460.0
8,345.0
8,497.0
8,307.0
8,426.0
8,321.0
8,440.0
8,335.0
8,454.0
8,349.0
8,468.0
8,363.0
8,482.0
8,377.0
8,496.0
7,484.0
7,729.0
7,568.0
7,813.0
7,652.0
7,897.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,401.0
7,457.0
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
68.0
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
84
84
84
84
84
84
56
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-29
213.5
213.5
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
151.614
119 & 126

119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
119 & 126
245
245
245
245
245
245
196
T to R
(MHz)
252550084
252550097
252550211
252550224
252550232
252550253
252550266
252550295
UFB11-A530-01-00
UFH11-A530-01-00
UFB11-A530-02-00
UFH11-A530-02-00
UFB11-A530-03-00
UFH11-A530-03-00
UFB11-A530-04-00
UFH11-A530-04-00
Page A2-30
UFB13-YYYY-XX-00
UFH13-YYYY-XX-00
253085375
253085383
253085396
253085408
253085429
253085437
UFB11-A490-05-00
UFH11-A490-05-00
UFB11-A490-06-00
UFH11-A490-06-00
UFB11-A490-07-00
UFH11-A490-07-00
10,675.0
11,205.0
10,795.0
11,325.0
10,915.0
11,445.0
11,035.0
11,565.0
10,700.0
11,200.0
10,855.0
11,355.0
11,010.0
11,510.0
10,675.0
11,165.0
10,795.0
11,285.0
10,915.0
11,405.0
11,035.0
11,525.0
7,731.0
8,042.0
7,835.0
8,146.0
7,717.0
8,028.0
10,855.0
11,385.0
10,975.0
11,505.0
11,135.0
11,665.0
11,215.0
11,745.0
10,890.0
11,390.0
11,045.0
11,545.0
11,200.0
11,700.0
10,855.0
11,345.0
10,975.0
11,465.0
11,095.0
11,585.0
11,215.0
11,705.0
7,867.0
8,178.0
7,971.0
8,282.0
7,867.0
8,178.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
7,905.0
8,024.0
8,171.0
8,290.0
8,017.0
8,136.0
8,283.0
8,402.0
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
490 & 500

490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490 & 500
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
490
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
311.32
266
266
266
266
T to R
(MHz)
180
180
180
180
220
220
180
180
190
190
190
190
190
190
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
136
136
136
136
136
136
119
119
119
119
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
13 GHz ODUs



252549396
252550000
252550021
252550034
252550042
252550055
252550063
252550076
UFB11-A490-01-00
UFH11-A490-01-00
UFB11-A490-02-00
UFH11-A490-02-00
UFB11-A490-03-00
UFH11-A490-03-00
UFB11-A490-04-00
UFH11-A490-04-00
11 GHz ODUs

251715115
251715128
251715136
251715149
253078966
253078987
UFB08-A311-01-00
UFH08-A311-01-00
UFB08-A311-02-00
UFH08-A311-02-00
UFB08-A311-03-00
UFH08-A311-03-00

Sagem Description
UFB11-YYYY-XX-00
UFH11-YYYY-XX-00
251323313
251323326
251323334
251323347
Sagem
P/N
UFB08-A266-01-00
UFH08-A266-01-00
UFB08-A266-02-00
UFH08-A266-02-00
Sagem Model
Number
253351688
253351696
253351708
253351716
253351729
253351737
251308316
251308324
251308337
251308345
251308358
251308366
251385425
251385412
253085440
253085458
253085461
253085482
253085490
253085502

UFB15-A322-01-00
UFH15-A322-01-00
UFB15-A322-02-00
UFH15-A322-02-00
UFB15-A322-03-00
UFH15-A322-03-00
UFB15-A420-01-00
UFH15-A420-01-00
UFB15-A420-02-00
UFH15-A420-02-00
UFB15-A420-03-00
UFH15-A420-03-00
UFB15-A420-04-00
UFH15-A420-04-00
UFB15-A475-01-00
UFH15-A475-01-00
UFB15-A475-02-00
UFH15-A475-02-00
UFB15-A475-03-00
UFH15-A475-03-00
UFB15-A490-01-00
UFH15-A490-01-00




252503733
252503808
252503650
252503712
252503600
252503639
UFB15-A315-01-00
UFH15-A315-01-00
UFB15-A315-02-00
UFH15-A315-02-00
UFB15-A315-03-00
UFH15-A315-03-00
15 GHz ODUs

251308209
251308212
251308220
251308064
251308072
251308085
251308093
251308303
UFB13-A266-01-00
UFH13-A266-01-00
UFB13-A266-02-00
UFH13-A266-02-00
UFB13-A266-03-00
UFH13-A266-03-00
UFB13-A266-04-00
UFH13-A266-04-00
Sagem Description
UFB15-YYYY-XX-00
UFH15-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem
P/N
Sagem Model
Number
14403
14893
14,500.0
14,975.0
14,660.0
15,135.0
14,783.0
15,258.0
14501
14921
14606
15026
14718
15138
14816
15236
14,627.0
14,942.0
14,725.0
15,040.0
14,823.0
15,138.0
14,627.0
14,942.0
14,725.0
15,040.0
14,823.0
15,138.0
14522
15012
14,668.0
15,143.0
14,828.0
15,303.0
14,883.0
15,358.0
14613
15033
14725
15145
14837
15257
14928
15348
14,746.0
15,061.0
14,844.0
15,159.0
14,942.0
15,257.0
14,746.0
15,061.0
14,844.0
15,159.0
14,942.0
15,257.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
12,751.0 12,814.0
13,017.0 13,080.0
12,807.0 12,870.0
13,073.0 13,136.0
12,863.0 12,926.0
13,129.0 13,192.0
12,919.0 12,982.0
13,185.0 13,248.0
119
119
168
168
168
168
100
100
112
112
119
119
119
119
112
112
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
Page A2-31
490
490
475
475
475
475
475
475
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
322
322
322
322
322
322
315
315
315
315
315
315
266
266
266
266
266
266
266
266
T to R
(MHz)
251308824
251308832
251308845
251308853
253085552
253085565
UFB18-1560-01-00
UFH18-1560-01-00
UFB18-1560-02-00
UFH18-1560-02-00
UFB18-1560-03-00
UFH18-1560-03-00
Page A2-32
UFB23-YYYY-XX-00
UFH23-YYYY-XX-00

251308738
251308746
251308759
251308767
251308770
251308791
251308803
251308811
UFB18-1010-01-00
UFH18-1010-01-00
UFB18-1010-02-00
UFH18-1010-02-00
UFB18-1010-03-00
UFH18-1010-03-00
UFB18-1010-04-00
UFH18-1010-04-00
17,700.0
19,260.0
17,840.0
19,400.0
17,700.0
19,260.0
17,685.0
18,695.0
17,930.0
18,940.0
18,180.0
19,190.0
18,400.0
19,410.0
14500
15228
14400
15044
14498
15142
14596
15240
14,500.0
15,140.0
14,605.0
15,245.0
18,000.0
19,560.0
18,140.0
19,700.0
18,140.0
19,700.0
17,985.0
18,995.0
18,230.0
19,240.0
18,480.0
19,490.0
18,700.0
19,710.0
14615
15343
14512
15156
14610
15254
14708
15352
14,610.0
15,250.0
14,715.0
15,355.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
14515
14634
15005
15124
14627
14746
15117
15236
14739
14858
15229
15348
1560
1560
1560
1560
1560
1560
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
728
728
644
644
644
644
644
644
640
640
640
640
490
490
490
490
490
490
T to R
(MHz)
300
300
300
300
440
440
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
115
115
112
112
112
112
112
112
110
110
110
110
119
119
119
119
119
119
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
23 GHz ODUs

UFB18-YYYY-XX-00
UFH18-YYYY-XX-00
18 GHz ODUs

UFB15-A728-01-00
UFH15-A728-01-00


251707001
251707019
251707022
251707030
251707043
251707051
253085510
253085523
253085531
253085544
UFB15-A640-01-00
UFH15-A640-01-00
UFB15-A640-02-00
UFH15-A640-02-00

Sagem Description
UFB15-A644-01-00
UFH15-A644-01-00
UFB15-A644-02-00
UFH15-A644-02-00
UFB15-A644-03-00
UFH15-A644-03-00
251308390
251308506
251308514
251308535
251385433
251385446
Sagem
P/N
UFB15-A490-02-00
UFH15-A490-02-00
UFB15-A490-03-00
UFH15-A490-03-00
UFB15-A490-04-00
UFH15-A490-04-00
Sagem Model
Number
251308866
251308874
251308887
251308895
251308907
251308915
251308928
251308936
251308949
251308957
251610993
251611031
253085573
253085586
253085594
253085606
253085627
253085648
251308960
251308275
251308283
251308296
251309003
251309011
251611065
251611094
UFB23-1008-01-00
UFH23-1008-01-00
UFB23-1008-02-00
UFH23-1008-02-00
UFB23-1200-01-00
UFH23-1200-01-00
UFB23-1200-02-00
UFH23-1200-02-00
UFB23-1200-03-00
UFH23-1200-03-00
UFB23-1200-04-00
UFH23-1200-04-00
UFB23-1200-05-00
UFH23-1200-05-00
UFB23-1200-06-00
UFH23-1200-06-00
UFB23-1200-07-00
UFH23-1200-07-00
UFB23-1232-01-00
UFH23-1232-01-00
UFB23-1232-02-00
UFH23-1232-02-00
UFB23-1232-03-00
UFH23-1232-03-00
UFB23-1232-04-00
UFH23-1232-04-00
251309024
251309032
251309045
251309053
252092991
252093005
UFB26-1008-01-00
UFH26-1008-01-00
UFB26-1008-02-00
UFH26-1008-02-00
UFB26-1008-03-00
UFH26-1008-03-00


26 GHz ODUs




Sagem Description
UFB26-A800-01-00
UFH26-A800-01-00
UFB26-YYYY-XX-00
UFH26-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem
P/N
Sagem Model
Number
21,500.0
22,732.0
21,786.0
23,018.0
22,093.0
23,325.0
22,386.0
23,618.0
21,600.0
22,800.0
22,000.0
23,200.0
22,400.0
23,600.0
21,530.0
22,730.0
21,820.0
23,020.0
22,110.0
23,310.0
22,400.0
23,600.0
22,330.0
23,338.0
22,610.0
23,618.0
24,549.0
25,557.0
24,829.0
25,837.0
25,109.0
26,117.0
24,885.0
25,893.0
25,165.0
26,173.0
25,445.0
26,453.0
24,250.0 24,450.0
25,050.0 25,250.0
21,200.0
22,432.0
21,472.0
22,704.0
21,779.0
23,011.0
22,086.0
23,318.0
21,200.0
22,400.0
21,600.0
22,800.0
22,000.0
23,200.0
21,200.0
22,400.0
21,490.0
22,690.0
21,780.0
22,980.0
22,070.0
23,270.0
21,994.0
23,002.0
22,274.0
23,282.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
336
336
336
336
336
336
200
200
Page A2-33
1008
1008
1008
1008
1008
1008
800
800
300
300
314
314
314
314
300
300
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
1232
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
330.0
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
400
400
400
400
400
400
336
336
336
336
1008
1008
1008
1008
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)
T to R
(MHz)
Page A2-34
UFB38-1260-01-00
UFH38-1260-01-00
UFB38-1260-02-00
UFH38-1260-02-00
251309066
251309074
251309087
251309095
37,044.0
38,304.0
37,604.0
38,864.0
38,595.0
39,295.0
38,795.0
39,495.0
38,995.0
39,695.0
39,195.0
39,895.0
31,815.0
32,627.0
32,179.0
32,991.0
37,632.0
38,892.0
38,192.0
39,452.0
38,805.0
39,505.0
39,005.0
39,705.0
39,205.0
39,905.0
39,405.0
40,105.0
32,207.0
33,019.0
32,571.0
33,383.0
Transmit Range
Min Freq
Max
(MHz)
Freq
(MHz)
1260
1260
1260
1260
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
812
812
812
812
T to R
(MHz)
588
588
588
588
210
210
210
210
210
210
210
210
392
392
392
392
Diplexer
Range
(MHz)


UFB38-A700-01-00
UFH38-A700-01-00
UFB38-A700-02-00
UFH38-A700-02-00
UFB38-A700-03-00
UFH38-A700-03-00
UFB38-A700-04-00
UFH38-A700-04-00
253085672
253085680
253085693
253085700
253085713
253085721
253085734
253085742
UFB38-YYYY-XX-00
UFH38-YYYY-XX-00
38 GHz ODUs

UFB32-A812-01-00
UFH32-A812-01-00
UFB32-A812-02-00
UFH32-A812-02-00
32 GHz ODUs
Sagem Description
252809268
252809271
252811341
252811359
Sagem
P/N
UFB32-YYYY-XX-00
UFH32-YYYY-XX-00
Sagem Model
Number
Page A2-35
SAGEMCOM ENERGY & TELECOM SAS

Headquarters: 250, route de lEmpereur
92848 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex - FRANCE
Tel: +33 (0)1 57 61 10 00 - Fax: +33 (0)1 57 61 10 01
www.sagemcom.com
253 255 964-D / February 2011 Issue 04
All rights reserved. The information and specifications included are subject to change without prior notice. Sagemcom tries to ensure that all information in this document is correct, but does not accept liability for error or omission.
Non contractual document.
All trademarks are registered by their respective owners. Simplified joint stock company - Capital 44 824 840 Euros - 518 250 337 R.C.S. NANTERRE -

User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and Operation Manual

Microwave Radio Link

SLF-H Installation and Operation Manual 253 255 964-D

Release 2.1 bis

Initial release in original issue

SLF-H Installation and Operation Manual 253 255 964-D

(3 000 337 386 R11 000-04)

253 255 964-D

(3 000 337 386 R11 000-03)

253 255 964-C

(3 000 337 386 R11 000-02)

253 255 964-B

253 255 964-A

(3 000 337 386 R11 000-01)

(Each new edition supersedes the previous edition)

HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST

1.8, 2.4.1, 6.5

In this respect, the European regulations ask you to dispose of it selectively:

SLF-H Installation and Operation Manual 253 255 964-D

Preservation of the environment as part of a sustainable development logic is an essential concern of

All trademarks are registered by their owners.

SLF-H Installation and Operation Manual 253 255 964-D

2.5 - MAC FILTERING .................................................................................................................................................... 2-6

2.4.4.1 - Description................................................................................................................................................................. 2-4

2.4 - SERVICE QUALITY (QOS) ....................................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.3.2.1 - EPLAN mode ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-2

2.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2. GIGABIT ETHERNET FUNCTION ........................................................................................................................ 2-1

1.5 - ACM CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................................................... 1-13

1.4.3.1 - Transmitter operation & performances .................................................................................................................... 1-12

1.4.3 - 1+1 Frequency diversity ............................................................................................................... 1-11

1.4.2.1 - Transmitter operation & performances .................................................................................................................... 1-10

1.4.2 - 1+1 Space diversity ...................................................................................................................... 1-10

1.4.1.1 - Transmitter operation & performances ...................................................................................................................... 1-9

1.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1

SLF-H Installation and Operation Manual 253 255 964-D

4.5.6.1 - Simulating an IDU Alarm........................................................................................................................................ 4-30

4.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4. COMMISSIONING CONFIGURATION AND TESTS .......................................................................................... 4-1

3.8.3 - MUX32 SPDH version .................................................................................................................. 3-21

3.8.2.1 - "POWER" access 4-pin connector ........................................................................................................................ 3-19

3.7.3 - Cable references for SLF-H.......................................................................................................... 3-16

3.7.2.1 - "POWER" access 4-pin connector ........................................................................................................................ 3-10

3.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3. INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-1

SLF-H Installation and Operation Manual 253 255 964-D

6.1 - HELP MENU ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-3

6. OPERATION PILOT............................................................................................................................................... 6-1

5.4 - CONFIGURING 2 MBIT/S PORTS............................................................................................................................. 5-32

5.3.5.1 - Flow control............................................................................................................................................................. 5-27

5.3.5 - Other features............................................................................................................................... 5-27

5.3.4.1 - Service types.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-7

5.3.3 - QOS Global configuration............................................................................................................... 5-5

5.3.2.1 - Physical configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.1 - ENTERING SITE NAMES ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5. FINAL LINK CONFIGURATION............................................................................................................................ 5-1

4.5.7 - Testing 1+1 configuration (optional) ............................................................................................. 4-32

4.5.6.5 - Simulating an RSL alarm......................................................................................................................................... 4-31

SLF-H Installation and Operation Manual 253 255 964-D

7.1 - INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE................................................................................................................................ 7-1